JP6427121B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is related to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

  As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device, and when a game medium is prized in a prize area such as a prize hole provided in the game area and a start condition is satisfied, plural types of identification There is a pachinko gaming machine in which information (hereinafter referred to as a display symbol) is variably displayed on a variable display device and it is determined whether or not to impart a predetermined gaming value according to the display result. . In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes a specific display mode, it becomes a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous for the player . For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has become a big hit gaming state opens a special electric role called a big winning opening or an attachment, and makes the winning of the gaming ball extremely easy to give the player a predetermined gaming value. Provide for a fixed time continuously.

  In such a gaming machine, a game operation member is assembled on a predetermined arrangement surface, and a first operation for changing a gaming state by pressing a game operation portion of the game operation member in a direction substantially perpendicular to the arrangement surface; There has been proposed one that enables a second operation of changing the gaming state by pressing the operation unit in a substantially horizontal direction with respect to the arrangement surface (for example, Patent Document 1). Further, in such a gaming machine, a joystick and a push button are provided on the front surface thereof, and the image of the character displayed on the display unit is moved in the direction according to the operation of the joystick. It has been proposed to perform an operation (e.g., Patent Document 2).

JP 2007-175118 A JP 2004-344228 A

In the techniques described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, it has been desired to improve the interest of the game.

This invention has been made in consideration of the above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine for improving the Yu technique interest.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.), and variable display pattern determination means (determining variable display pattern) For example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S261 to S269), a first detection unit (for example, the stick controller 30) capable of detecting the player's first operation on the operation unit, and a second operation of the player A second detection means (for example, a push button 31B etc.) that can be detected, a first effect (for example, an operation effect B, an operation effect C-1 etc.) regarding at least the first operation, and a second effect (for the second operation For example, the effect determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 12) that can determine which effect is to be executed among the operation effect A-1, the operation effect A-2, etc. Effect executing means capable of executing the effect determined by the effect determining means during execution of the variable display and the portion executing the process of steps SA03 to SA06) (eg, the push button for the effect control CPU 120 in step S558) Use reach effect processing, continuous hitting reach effect processing of step S560, tilting reach effect processing of step S562, a portion for executing the stick use reach effect processing of step S564, etc.), the effect determining means determines the variable display pattern Even when the same variable display pattern is determined by the means, it is possible to selectively determine which of the first effect and the second effect to be performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 Operation effect A-1 with reference to the operation effect determination table 144 in step SA06 The operation effect A-2, the operation effect B, the portion to be determined to any of the operation effect C-1, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means incorporated in the operation unit and capable of vibrating, the vibration effect execution means When the first effect is executed, vibration is possible, and the effect executing means is determined to execute any of the first effect and the second effect by the effect determining means. But, after executing the effect by a common representation embodiment, the first effect, and, of the second effect, Ri executable der the notification effect for notifying whether one of the effect is performed, the variable display of Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect indicating possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player during execution, and judgment means capable of judging whether or not the specific effect is performed; Determination by the determination means And a special effect execution unit capable of executing a special effect relating to any of the first operation and the second operation before variable display targeted for the determination is started based on the result of Furthermore, during the execution of the specific effect, any of the first effect and the second effect can be performed . Note that "during variable display" is not limited to the period from the start of variable display until the variable display result is derived and displayed, and the display of the variable display result ends after the variable display result is derived and displayed. You may include the period until it does.

According to such a configuration, game interest can be improved .

  Furthermore, the effect determination means may selectively determine whether to execute the first effect or the second effect based on the setting by the player (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step S454). A portion that determines the operation effect in step SA06, etc., in accordance with the operation item buffer value set in the processing of S458).

  In such a configuration, one of the first effect and the second effect is selectively executed based on the setting by the player. This makes it possible to execute an effect using an appropriate detection unit in accordance with the player's preference.

  In addition, detection history storage means (for example, a push operation history counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, a trigger operation history counter, etc.) for storing the detection history of the operation by the first detection means and the second detection means The effect determining means may selectively determine whether to execute the first effect or the second effect based on the detection history stored in the detection history storage means (for example, the effect) According to the operation item buffer value set in the operation item change setting process of step S578, the control CPU 120 determines the operation effect in step SA06).

  In such a configuration, one of the first effect and the second effect is selectively executed based on the detection history of the operation by the first detection means and the second detection means. This makes it possible to execute an effect using an appropriate detection unit in accordance with the player's preference.

  A recognition operation for performing a predetermined effect operation (for example, a blowing vibration effect or the like) that can be recognized by the player only when the operation is detected by any one of the first detection unit and the second detection unit. Means (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the processing of step SC33, SC35, SC57, SC59, SC61, SD07, SD09, SD17, etc.) and the first and second effects by the effect executing means When one of the effects using the one detection means is performed, while the predetermined effect operation by the recognition operation means is started, the other effect different from the one effect is performed by the effect execution means Operation restriction means for restricting a predetermined effect operation by the recognition operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 After executing the process of step SA08 based on the determination of No in SA07, the processes of steps SC33, SC35, SC57, SC59, SC61, SC61, SD07, SD09, SD17 are performed, while the process based on the determination of Yes in step SA07 And the like) may be provided.

  In such a configuration, a predetermined effect operation is performed in which the player can recognize only when the operation is detected by any one of the first detection unit and the second detection unit. While the predetermined effect operation by the recognition operation means is started only when one effect using the one of the detection means is performed among the effect and the second effect, the recognition is performed when the other effect is performed The predetermined effect operation by the operation means is limited. Thus, it is possible to prevent the recognition operation means from operating wastefully.

  The effect execution means can execute combined effect (for example, operation effect C-2) using both the first detection means and the second detection means based on the determination result by the effect determination means (for example, operation effect C-2). The part for which the effect control CPU 120 executes the stick-push combined reach effect process of step S566, etc.), the effect determining means determines the combined effect only when it is determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state The execution control may be determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 assigns the determined value to the operation effect C-2 only when the variable display mode is non-probable change (big hit) or positive change (big hit) in the process of step SA06. Operation effect C-2 can be determined by referring to the performed operation effect determination table 144).

  In such a configuration, the combined effect using both the first detection means and the second detection means can be performed only when the determination means determines to control in the advantageous state. By enhancing the sense of expectation to be executed and promoting the action by the player, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  When it is determined by the determination means that control to the advantageous state is made, a definite effect of notifying that control to the advantageous state is determined before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed The game further includes execution means for executing fixed effect (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the big hit fixed effect control process in step S554, etc.), the fixed effect execution means playing the game in the effect executed by the effect execution means When the action by the player is detected, the determined effect is executed at the timing related to the detection, and when the action by the player is not detected, the determined effect may not be executed (for example, the effect control) CPU 120 executes the process of step SB29 based on the determination of Yes in step SB26 or step SB28. Such as the portion of the line).

  In such a configuration, when the action by the player is detected in the effect, the finalization effect is executed at the timing related to the detection before the variable display result is derived and displayed. It can improve the interest. In addition, when the action by the player is detected in the effect, the fixed effect is executed, but when the operation by the player is not detected, the fixed effect is not executed. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate.

  The effect executing means may execute the second effect in the same effect mode as the detection by the second detecting means according to the detection by the first detecting means (for example, the push button use reach effect in step S558) In the processing, not only when the determination of Yes is made in Step SC04, but also when the determination of Yes is made in Step SC05, the processing after Step SC09 is executed, and in the continuous hitting reach effect processing of Step S560, Not only when the determination of Yes is made in Step SD04, but also when the determination of Yes is made in Step SD05, the processing of Steps SD08 to SD10 is executed).

  In such a configuration, even if detection by the first detection means is performed instead of detection by the second detection means in the second effect, the same effect mode is obtained, so the player's interest is detected by the first detection means. By aggregating and promoting the action by the player, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  The effect executing means may change the effect mode in the second effect according to the number of times of detection by the second detecting means (for example, in the continuous hitting reach effect process in step S560, based on the determination of Yes in step SD09) Then, the achievement effect by the process of step SD10 is executed, and the non-delivery effect by the process of step SD12 is executed based on the determination of Yes in step SD11).

  In such a configuration, since the effect mode in the second effect changes according to the number of times of detection by the second detection means, the second detection means using the second detection means that is easy to detect the player's continuous action (continuous hitting) is used. The game interest can be improved by appropriately changing the effect mode in the effect and raising the player's willingness to participate.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a side view showing an example of composition of a stick controller. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pseudo | simulation chance chance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates change pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for effects counted by the side of a production control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a presentation control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a pre-reading effect classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notification object initial position determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a notification object selection pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the pre-reading effect determination table at the time of ending. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the operation presentation determination table, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a big hit fixed presentation determination table, etc. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a preliminary production effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing of a specific pattern common range. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display etc. in the operation item selection effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot decision production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of push button use reach production processing. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display etc. in operation production A-1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous hit reach production process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display etc. in the operation effect A-2. It is a flow chart which shows an example of inclination reach production processing. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of effect display and the like in an operation effect B. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stick use reach production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows order, such as a tilt detection period and a push detection period. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display etc. in the operation effect C-1. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stick push combined reach production processing. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing an order of a tilt detection period, a push detection period, a press detection period and the like. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect display etc. in the operation effect C-2. It is a flow chart which shows an example of variable display stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of operation item change setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit inside production processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pre-reading production decision processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stick use pre-reading effect processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stick use pre-reading effect processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a consecutive hit pre-reading effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stick-push combined pre-reading effect processing. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing an order of a tilt detection period, a push detection period, a press detection period and the like. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end production processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ending production determination processing. It is a figure showing an example of an effect display etc. in pre-reading effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect display etc. in pre-reading effect.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is constituted of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc., and in the special view game as an example of the variable display game, each is identified A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure") which is a plurality of possible types of identification information (special identification information) is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, with different combinations of what is turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED, for example. A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special figure game and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display unit divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols that are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to the start of one of the first special figure variation by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special figure variation by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special figure game, “left The variation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction, update display by rotation, etc.) is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "middle" and "right". After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special view game, each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the "left", "middle", and "right" The finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the result of variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. In addition, each decorative symbol display area of “left”, “middle” and “right” is movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbol can be displayed by being reduced or enlarged. May be

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special pattern using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols which can be respectively identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed. Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to stop display (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) identification information such as a decorative symbol and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, the change speed of the decorative symbol is "0", and the decorative symbol is displayed. For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed in a definite manner, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the decorative pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  In the image display device 5, three areas may be provided by bonding, separating, or bonding and separation as display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the variable display of the first special figure is executed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special view is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters are displayed on the decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Numbers “1” to “8”, letters “A” to “H”, 8 character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers or characters or symbols with character images, etc. For example, it may be a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure. In addition to these eight kinds of decorative designs, blank designs (designs that do not constitute a big hit combination) may be included. Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. The decorative design is not limited to eight types, but may be any number (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  For example, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, for example, from the smaller symbol number to the larger symbol number sequentially from the top to the bottom while the decorative symbol changes. Flowing scroll display is performed, and when the decorative symbol with the largest symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, subsequently, the decorative symbol with the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 5L of "left", etc.), scroll display is performed from those with large symbol numbers to those with small symbols, When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed subsequently.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 5H, a holding storage display for specifying the number of holdings of variable display (number of special drawing holding memories) corresponding to the special drawing game is performed. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, for suspension of variable display corresponding to the special view game. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the like, the hold of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done.

  As an example, the start winning combination storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right sequentially from the variable display game in which the starting condition is satisfied first based on the occurrence of starting winnings. There is. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening, normally non- One of the display parts which are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the display part at the left end of the display parts which are not displayed) is changed to blue display. In addition, when the starting condition (second starting condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied based on the game ball having entered the second starting winning opening, normally non- One of the displayed parts is changed to red. Thereafter, for example, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special view game using the first special view and the start condition (second start condition) of the special view game using the second special view is satisfied, The display on the left display area is removed, and the display on each display area is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts which has been changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display parts whose display color has been changed) is returned to non-display.

  In the start winning storage display area 5H, a player etc. may be able to recognize the number of special drawing reservations by displaying a number indicating the number of special drawings storage, etc. Along with or in place of the start winning storage display area 5H, a display may be provided to display the number of stored special figures. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning combination storage display area 5H, a first hold for specifying the number of special view hold storages to be identifiable on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special view hold memory number as the number of valid start winning balls which has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be identifiable. The second reserve display 25B displays the second special view reserve memory number as the number of valid start-up winning balls that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B in a distinguishable manner. The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are, for example, the number corresponding to the upper limit (for example, "4") in each of the first special view reserve storage number and the second special view reserve storage number (for example, 4 Components) are configured.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are established, the special view game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and so on. When the start condition for starting the figure game is not established, suspension of variable display corresponding to the special figure game occurs. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special condition is not satisfied if the first start condition for starting the special view game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied. The number of pending storages is incremented by one (1), and the execution of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special condition is not satisfied if the second start condition for starting the special view game using the second special view based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied. The number of pending storages is incremented by one (1) and the execution of the special drawing game using the second special drawing is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure reservation memory number is decremented by 1 and the special figure game is executed using the second special figure Is decremented by one.

  The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special symbol variably displayed in the special drawing game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is separate from the decorative symbol A special symbol variable display area may be provided to display as being identifiable. As an example, in response to the variable display of the special symbol being started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbol variable in the special symbol variable display area The variation of the effect image indicating “◎” or “x” corresponding to the display is started. Thereafter, in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game ending and the finalized special symbol being stopped and displayed, "」 "previously determined corresponding to the finalized special symbol in the special symbol variable display area The effect image such as “x” or the like may be stopped and displayed. For example, when the determined special symbol in the special figure game is a big hit symbol, "◎" may be displayed in a stopped state in the special symbol variable display area, and in the case of a lost symbol, "x" may be displayed stopped.

  Under the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first start winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B has a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in the vertical position and an enlarged open state in the tilting position by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric vehicle shown in FIG. A tulip type character (usually an electric character) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal motorized combination is off. It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric combination is on. It becomes an expansion and release state which is easy to enter. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state.

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. Form a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening. The game ball which has passed (entered) the special winning opening formed on the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG.

  A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is in the open state in the special variable winning winning ball device 7, the gaming ball is in the other winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, it will be in the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it is not possible for the player to pass (enter) the gaming ball to the big winning hole to obtain a winning ball, which is a disadvantage for the player. It becomes a state.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol which is normally displayed (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such variable display of ordinary symbols is referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game"). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. The symbol numbers corresponding to each are attached to a plurality of kinds of ordinary symbols. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. In addition, the normal symbol display 20 is not limited to what variably displays the number which shows "0"-"9", the symbol which shows "-", etc. as an ordinary symbol, For example, "(circle)" and "x" Normal symbols are variably displayed by alternately turning on the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be shown, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle" and "right" in a predetermined order It may be one. Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, one or more general winning opening is provided which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member May be In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a game ball entering one of the general winning openings is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured. At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the like) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor). At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 30 which can be held by the player is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of the stick controller 30. The stick controller 30 is multidirectional (for example, four directions including eight directions including front and rear, left and right, and more directions including these middle) by holding and tilting operation by the player. A trigger button 31A is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod 30A (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is on when the player grips the operating rod 30A). There is. In a state where the player holds the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), the trigger button 31A performs a predetermined instruction operation by pushing or pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger) It should just be comprised so that it can do. Inside the operating rod 30A, a trigger sensor 35A for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling the trigger button 31A or the like, a vibration motor 34 for vibrating the operating rod 30A or the like may be incorporated.

  A tilting direction sensor unit 32 for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod 30A may be provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 30, or the like. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit 32 is a two transparent photo sensor disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod 30A as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 1 4) combining a parallel sensor pair) and two transmission type photo sensors (vertical sensor pairs) disposed vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod 30A viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include two transmission type photo sensors. The attachment position of the stick controller 30 in the lower tray is not limited to the central portion of the lower tray, but may be a position which is closer to the left or right.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the display at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper tray main body (for example, above the stick controller 30). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation performed by the player on the push button 31B may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 31B. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 31B and the stick controller 30 are in the vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 31B and the stick controller 30 may be shifted to either the left side or the right side in the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 31B and the stick controller 30 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, but may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  The trigger button 31A provided on the stick controller 30 is configured such that an instruction operation can be performed by pushing and pulling the operating finger or the like while the player holds the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with the operating hand. ing. On the other hand, the push button 31 B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 which forms the upper plate separately from the stick controller 30, and the player does not hold the operating rod 30 A of the stick controller 30, etc. In the above, the instruction operation can be performed by pressing the operation hand. Therefore, the trigger button 31A is more difficult than the push button 31B in the continuous hitting operation as the continuous instruction operation.

  For example, at a predetermined position above the lower tray in the gaming machine frame 3, a blower fan 33 for blowing air toward the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is provided. For example, when the rendering operation using the stick controller 30 is executed, the blower fan 33 performs a stick controller along with an operation of vibrating the operating rod 30A by the vibration motor 34 built in the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30. It is sufficient if the air can be blown toward the 30 control rods 30A.

  The regular game with the normal symbol display 20 has a normal symbol displayed by the normal symbol display 20 such that the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the common drawing start condition for executing the variable display is established, for example, based on the common drawing start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol being satisfied, for example, that the previous common drawing game is ended, It is started. In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time as the common-pattern fluctuation time elapses, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common drawing", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 6B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the gaming ball having passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed on the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 3 For example, after the first start condition is established, the process is started based on the establishment of the first start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special view game or the big hit gaming state. In the special drawing game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed on the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied due to the event, the process is started based on, for example, that the second start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special view game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, when the predetermined time which becomes the special figure fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol The derived special symbol (special drawing display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loss". . After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is the missing symbol. . Each symbol such as a big hit symbol or lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Also, the special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol. In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5" and "7" that are the big hit symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers "3" and "5" become the 15R big hit symbol, " The special symbol indicating the number of 7 "is the 16R big hit symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (15 R big hit state) controlled after the 15R big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol fixed in the special figure game, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is a predetermined period for the first period. The first variable winning ball device 7 is an advantageous first state for the player by opening the big winning opening in a period until (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. A round to change to (open state) is performed. In this way, the special winning opening door with the special winning opening opened during execution of the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then the special variable winning opening is closed by the special variable winning ball The device 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. In the 15R big hit state, the number of times of execution of the round which is an open cycle of the big winning opening becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). The game in the 15R jackpot state in which the number of rounds executed is “15” is also referred to as the 15-time open game. In such a 15R big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, "15") of balls (prize balls) are obtained each time the game ball wins in the big winning opening.

  In the big hit gaming state (16 R big hit state) controlled after the 16R big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game, the same round as the round in the 15 R big hit state is executed. On the other hand, in the case of the 16R big hit state, the number of rounds executed is the second round number (for example, “16”) different from the case of the 15R big hit state. A game in such a 16R big hit state is also referred to as an open game 16 times. In the 16R big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, "15") of balls (prize balls) are obtained each time the game balls win in the big winning opening.

  15R big hit state is based on the special symbol showing the number of "1" among the special symbols showing the numbers of "3" and "5" becoming the 15R big hit symbol being displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special figure game. After completion, as one of the special game states, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in which the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared to the normal state. Controlled by Here, the normal state is the normal gaming state as the gaming state different from the specific gaming state such as the big hit gaming state, the probability change state, and the time saving state, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized (for example, system reset is performed The same control as in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on is performed as in the case of FIG. The time saving state ends if either of a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) of the special figure game is executed and the variable display result is a "big hit" when either condition is met first. Good. Like the special symbol showing the number "3", the 15R big hit symbol that is controlled to the short time state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the special symbol fixed in the special figure game is 15R non-probability variation It is called a jackpot symbol (also referred to as "usually a jackpot symbol"). In addition, that the 15R non probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed among the 15 R big hit symbols and the variable display result is "big hit" is called "15 R non probability variation big hit" (also referred to as "15 R usually big hit").

  15R big hit state is based on the special symbol showing the number of "5" among the special symbols showing the numbers of "3" and "5" becoming the 15R big hit symbol being displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special figure game. After the 16R big hit state is over based on the special symbol showing the number of "7" which becomes the 16R big hit symbol and being displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game after it is finished, it is different from the time saving state. As one of the game states, for example, it is controlled to a probability change state (high probability state) in which probability change control (probability change control) is continuously performed along with time shortening control in which the special map change time is shortened compared to the normal state. . In this definite change state, the variable display result is "big hit" and the probability of being further controlled to the big hit game state is improved to be higher than the normal state or the time saving state in the variable display of each special drawing game or decorative symbol. Do. Such a definite change state may continue until the next variable display result is "big hit" regardless of the number of times the special drawing game is executed. As in the case of the short time state, the time shortening control in the definite change state may be ended when the special figure game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). Alternatively, the time shortening control in the definite change state may be continued until the next variable display result is "big hit" regardless of the number of times the special drawing game is executed.

  Like the special symbol indicating the number of "5", the 15R big hit symbol controlled to a definite change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game is a 15R positive variation big hit symbol It is called. Like the special symbol showing the number of "7", the 16R big hit symbol controlled to a definite change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game is a 16R positive variation big hit symbol It is called. Among the 15R big hit symbols, the fact that the 15R positive variation big hit symbols are stopped and displayed and the variable display result is "big hit" is called "15R positive variation big hit". The fact that the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is a "big hit" is referred to as "16R probability variation big hit". In addition, 15R big hit symbols "3" and "5", 16R big hit symbol "7" is an example, and each big hit symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or recognizing the jackpot type, the jackpot symbol may be a predetermined symbol (for example, "ko") without being a number.

  As described above, when the big hit symbol is stopped (displayed) as the determined special symbol in the special figure game, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and a predetermined number of rounds can be executed, and the player easily makes a large number of winning balls. The player is given a game value that is advantageous for the player to earn.

  Control for shortening the variation time of the normal symbol (general drawing fluctuation time) in the regular drawing game with the normal symbol display 20 as well as time shortening control in the definite variation state and time saving state, or in the common drawing game of each time Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol will be "per common figure" than in the normal state, the movable wing in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result is "per common part" The game ball is likely to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time for tilt control of a piece longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilts more than in the normal state. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the second start condition is established. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second start winning entry and is advantageous for the player, as well as the time shortening control in the probability change state and the time reduction state, is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B is more likely to be satisfied, and the special drawing game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result is a "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, by performing high opening control, it becomes easy to be in the big hit game state compared with the normal state. The period during which high opening control can be performed is also called high opening control period, and in this period, time reduction control is performed when the gaming state in pachinko gaming machine 1 is either a definite change state or a short time state. It may be the same as the period.

  When the high open control period, it is also said that the gaming state is high base. On the other hand, when the high opening control period is not in effect, it is also said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state also referred to as a low probability high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state also referred to as a low probability low base state. Also, in the probability change state, when it is a high opening control period in which high opening control is performed, it is a gaming state also called high probability high base state, and when it is not high opening control period, it is also called high probability low base state Playing state.

  In "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 4A Among the special drawing games using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B, variable display of the decorative design is started in response to the start of one of the special drawing games. Then, a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in a predetermined reach state. Here, with the reach state, a decorative symbol ("reach variation symbol") which is not displayed as stopped when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination The display state in which the fluctuation continues, or the display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while constituting all or a part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance The decorative pattern display area (for example, "inside") which is not displayed as stopped when the decorative pattern (for example, the decorative symbol showing "7" alphanumeric characters) constituting the defined big hit combination is stopped and displayed In the symbol display area 5C, etc.) The display condition in which the decorative symbol is changing, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" It is a display state fluctuating in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is executed. May be Such a rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And each reach mode differs in the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability"). That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be the "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are set in advance. And when the reach aspect of the super reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β appears, the variable display result may become “big hit” compared to the case where the reach aspect of the normal reach appears (big hit expectation) Becomes higher.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of operation effects such as an operation effect using the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30 and the trigger button 31A, and an operation effect using the push button 31B as reach effects of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β. It is possible to selectively execute one of the types of operation effects. In addition, the reach effect of the super reach also includes an operation effect using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B. Of these plural types of operation effects, the determination of which operation effect to execute is performed by the player, the history of the operation of instructing the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B (operation history), the variable display result On the basis of the result of the determination as to whether or not to

  Unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the variable display result may become the "big hit", etc. A variable display effect may be executed to notify the player by a variable display mode of the decorative symbol. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "slip" and "simulated link" can be performed, and each of the effect operations is performed in response to the change pattern being determined on the main substrate 11 side. It is determined whether or not.

  In the variable display effect of "slip", after changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right", two or more decorative design display areas (For example, after displaying the decorative symbols temporarily on the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, "1" or the like) of the decorative symbol display areas displayed for temporary stop Stop the display after changing the decoration pattern again in the decoration pattern display area of "2") (for example, one or both of the decoration pattern display area 5L of "left" and the decoration symbol display area 5R of "right") As a result, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being met once. After displaying the decorative symbols temporarily in all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R until the finalized decorative symbols are derived and displayed. Effects can be displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to a maximum of three times) in which all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R cause the decorative symbol to change again (simulated continuous change). The number of times of pseudo series change is the display of "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display except for the first change from the start of variable display of decorative symbol to the temporary stop of all decorative symbols at first. It is the number of times that the decorative pattern changes again in all of the areas 5L, 5C, 5R. As an example, in the variable display effect of "pseudo run", the pseudo run chance eye of the special combination as shown in FIG. 4 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, “left symbol” shown in FIG. 4 and the like is a symbol symbol displayed temporarily in the symbol symbol display area 5L of “left” and “middle symbol” is displayed in the symbol symbol display area 5C of “middle” The "right symbol" is a symbol displayed on the "right" symbol display area 5R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is displayed in a stationary manner, it is displayed to the player by, for example, re-changing the decorative symbol simply by performing a swing fluctuation display or stopping for a short time. It may be notified that the decorative pattern is not determined. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol may be re-varied after the decorative symbol is held to such an extent that the player recognizes that the displayed decorative symbol has been determined.

  The variable display effect of “pseudo series” may be set so that the possibility of the variable display result becoming “big hit” increases as the number of times of pseudo series fluctuation (re-variation) increases. As a result, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of "pseudo run" is performed by temporarily stopping any one of the run runs GC1 to GC8, and the number of times of the run simulation increases. , The sense of expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is enhanced. In this embodiment, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) once to three times in the variable display effect of the “pseudo-series”. Based on this, it is possible to make the variable display of the decorative pattern appear as if it had been started two to four times in succession. The number of times of pseudo series fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of "pseudo series" may be made to be able to be performed more than once or three times, for example, four times or five times.

  When a variable display effect of “pseudo series” is executed, a re-change effect by a related display effect or the like is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including a first change (simulated continuous change) It is also good. As an example, during the period of each variable display (including the first change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo series”, one of the plurality of decorative LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is lit 1 It may be controlled to increase one by one. In addition, the display color of the decorative LED may be controlled to be changed during the period of each variable display (including the first change), and it is possible to change one of the plurality of decorative LEDs to be lit. May be controlled. As another example, a model for effect (movable member) provided inside or outside of the game area operates during the period of each variable display (including the first change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo series”. It may be controlled. Further, as another example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during the period of each variable display (including the first change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo series”. May be In addition to a part or all of these re-change effects, or instead of a part or all of these re-change effects, lighting or blinking of the decorative LED, operation of the effect model, and display of the effect image It may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect combining some or all. At this time, rather than the case where the re-variation effect is executed with only one type of effect mode, it includes a period in which the re-variance effect combining a plurality of effect modes is executed, or a plurality of re-variance effects When the presentation mode in is changed, the reach presentation of the super reach may be executed, the variable display result may be "big hit", "15R positive variation big hit" or "16R positive variation big hit", etc. May be increased.

  The rendering operation to be executed as the re-variation rendering includes a rendering operation by an optional rendering object such as, for example, voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 It may be one. Further, for example, the difference in the output of sound and sound effects by the speakers 8L and 8R, the difference in the movement of the effect model (the difference in the operating speed, the difference in the operating distance, the difference in the operating direction, etc.) Depending on the difference in movement of the character image (difference in movement speed, difference in movement distance, difference in movement direction, etc.) By changing or changing the display of the background image, the effect mode in the re-change effect may be different. Furthermore, apart from the re-variation effect that is executed during the change of the decorative symbol, for example, the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the game at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol which becomes any of the pseudo continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8. The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped by the rendering operation on any rendering object such as the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9.

  As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of such a decorative pattern, in addition to "slip" and "pseudo ream", for example, "development chance eye", "development chance eye end", "slip after stop chance" And various other rendering operations may be performed. Here, in the variable display effect of “the development chance eye”, “left”, “middle”, “right” until variable decoration result of the decorative symbol is started and the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in all, the temporary display of the decorative symbol constituting the development chance included in the predetermined special combination, and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in a reach state As a predetermined reach effect is started. Thereby, when the decorative symbol constituting the development chance is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and after the reach state, the variable display result is the "big hit". Expectations are enhanced. In addition, in the variable display effect of "development chance eye end", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" An effect display is performed in which a decorative symbol of a combination predetermined as a development opportunity is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol. In the variable display effect of "slip after chance stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", until after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the finalized decorative symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed , "Left", "middle", "right" in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R All temporary stop the decorative symbol of the lost combination (special combination) which will be any of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8 Unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo series” in which the decorative symbol is again changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R after being displayed, in part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R By changing the decorative pattern again, effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  Unlike variable display effects such as reach effect or "slip" or "simulated link" during variable display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, image display or voice output as a message, etc. As described above, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may reach the reach state by the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol, that the reach effect by the super reach may be executed, variable A notice effect may be performed to notify the player that the display result may be a "big hit" or the like. The production operation to be the preview production is the variable display state of the decorative design after the variable display of the decorative design is started in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" It is sufficient if it is performed (started) before (i.e., before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may become a "big hit" may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state. As a specific example, a plurality of types of advance notice effects such as “character advance notice” and “operation advance notice” may be set to be executable. The effect operation to be the advance effect effect may be any operation as long as no change occurs in the variable display time of the special symbol (special pattern fluctuation time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the advance notice effect of "character advance notice", an effect display for displaying a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position is performed, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5 during variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, as the display of the character image, a character image separate from the decorative design may be displayed still or displayed in motion (animation display), or a character image variably displayed integrally with the decorative design may be used. The operation display (animation display) may be performed in a display form different from the variable display of the decorative design.

  In the notice effect of "at the time of operation advance", the instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 and the instruction operation (press operation) on the push button 31B are performed by the player during variable display of the decorative symbol. In response to the change, the rendering operation is changed by, for example, changing the display of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5 or changing the sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As an example, in the notice effect of "at the time of operation advance notice", a predetermined effect operation to be a button operation promoting effect is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The button operation promotion effect is displayed on the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B by the player, for example, by displaying an effect image such as a prepared character image or message image at a predetermined position on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. It may be a rendering operation that prompts an operation act. The effect operation for prompting the player to perform an operation is not limited to the one for displaying the effect image on the image display device 5, but one for outputting a predetermined sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED One that lights or blinks in a predetermined lighting pattern, one that operates movable members provided in a rendering combination provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or a combination of any of these It may be. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, it becomes an operation effective period in which the operation by the player is effectively detected. Then, when the operation to the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B is detected by the trigger sensor 35A or the push sensor 35B within the operation valid period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected. In addition, for example, one of a plurality of effect images prepared in advance may be displayed on the image display device 5 or an effect corresponding to an audio pattern of the plurality of audio patterns prepared in advance. Various rendering operations such as outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed.

  A big hit informing that the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" at a predetermined timing within a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized symbol is derived and displayed. A fixed effect may be performed. As a big hit finalization effect, for example, the speaker 8L, 8R to output a predetermined decision notification sound (such as a sound effect of "Pikien"), a predetermined position of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a gaming machine frame surrounding the game area Lighting a predetermined lamp (for example, a flash lamp or the like) disposed in the inside of 3 or inside a predetermined effect product (for example, a flash lamp or the like) in a predetermined lighting mode (for example, flash lighting or the like) Displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a character image corresponding to a big hit decision) in the display area of the game, operating a predetermined effect for use in a predetermined operation mode (for example, rotation) provided inside or outside the game area The variable display result can be a "big hit" by operating or vibrating, etc.), or by a predetermined rendering operation including part or all of them. As long as it can inform the user that was boss.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special drawing game, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol does not reach the predetermined state after the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started. The finalized decorative design that is a non-reach combination of may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "no reach lost") when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is displayed as a stop as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach loss combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss". In addition, the definite decoration pattern which becomes a non-reach combination, and the definite decoration pattern which becomes a reach combination are collectively also called the definite decoration pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol showing the number of "3" which is the number of "3" which is 15R non probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the final special symbol in the special figure game as the special symbol to be decided, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is In response to the reaching state, after a predetermined reach effect is performed, a finalized decorative symbol to be a predetermined non-probability variation big hit combination (also referred to as a “usually big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed. Here, for the finalized decorative symbol that is a non-probable variation big hit combination, symbol numbers variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5, for example Among the decorative symbols of "1" to "8", any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are "2", "4", "6" and "8" is "left", "middle", What is necessary is just to be displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the "right" and to be stopped and displayed. A decorative symbol whose symbol number constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination is an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” in this way is called a non-probable variation symbol (also referred to as “normal symbol”) . Then, in response to the determined special symbol in the special figure game becoming the 15R non-probable variation big hit symbol, a decoration pattern in which the fixed decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. The variable display mode of is referred to as a “non-probable change” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is also referred to as a “15R non-probable change” type of the big hit type. In this way, after the variable display result becomes "big hit" by the variable display mode of "non-probability change", it is controlled to 15R big hit gaming state, and when the 15 R big hit state ends, it is controlled to time saving state.

  When the special symbol showing the number of "5" which is a 15R probability variation big hit symbol among the special symbols to be decided special symbol in the special figure game and which is 15R big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, or the "7" which is 16R big hit symbol When the special symbol indicating a number is stopped and displayed, the same reach effect as when the jackpot type is "15R non-probability change" is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. After being done, or after the reach effect different from the case where the jackpot type is “15R non-probability change” is performed, etc., the finalized decoration symbol that is a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed . Here, the finalized symbol pattern to be a probability variation big hit combination is, for example, symbol numbers variably displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5 are " Among the decorative symbols 1 "to" 8 ", any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd" 1 "," 3 "," 5 "and" 7 "is" left "," middle "," " What is necessary is just to be displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the right "and to be stopped and displayed. A decorative symbol whose symbol number constituting the probability variation big hit combination is an odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” in this way is called a probability variation symbol.

  A variable display mode of a decorative symbol in which the definite decorative symbol of the probability variation big combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc., corresponding to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game becoming the 15R probability variation big hit symbol. Is included in the variable display mode of “probable variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, it is said that the jackpot type is "15R definite variation". In addition, in response to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game becoming the 16R big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc, the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the definite decorative symbol of the definite variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed The aspect is also included in the variable display aspect of “probable variation” in the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, it is said that the jackpot type is "16R definite variation".

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol which is a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable variation big hit combination or a positive variation big hit combination, a re-lottery effect may be executed as a kind of probability variation promotion effect. In the re-lottery effect, for example, after temporarily displaying a decorative pattern to be a non-probable variation big hit combination on the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5, for example The left "," "middle", "right" decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R again in the state that the same decorative symbol is aligned, and decorative symbol (probable symbol) and non-deterministic big hit combination, Any one of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) to be a combination of probability variation big hit is displayed as a finalized display symbol (final stop display) as a finalized decoration symbol. Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is “15R non-probability change”, as the re-lottery effect, the decoration symbol that has been temporarily stopped is re-changed and then the non-probability change big-hit combination is decided During the change promotion failure production to derive and display the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "15R definite variation" or "16R definite variation", the decoration pattern that has been temporarily stopped is re-varied as the re-lottery effect, and then the variation is definite. Sometimes there is a change during promotion success effect to be displayed while stopping and displaying a finalized decoration pattern to be a big hit combination, or there is also a case where a change promotion failure effect during change is carried out. The re-lottery effect including such a change failure promotion effect during change and a change promotion success effect during change is also referred to as a change promotion effect.

  After the display of the definite decoration symbol to be non-probable variation big hit combination is derived and displayed, during the execution of the round at the start of the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state, the next round after any round is finished at the big hit gaming state During the period until the start, during the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc., it will be a notification effect of whether or not to control in a definite change state A promotion effect may be performed. Note that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion promotion may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the like. The jackpot promotion promotion that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state may be referred to in particular as "ending promotion promotion". Such jackpot promotion promotion is also a kind of probability change promotion production.

  In the jackpot promotion promotion, there is no jackpot promotion promotion production that announces that there is a promotion where the gaming state becomes a definite change state despite the finalized decoration pattern being a non-probability change big hit combination and there is no promotion to become a definite change state There is with the jackpot promotion failure production which announces. For example, in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probable variation symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result or the variable symbol display of the ornament symbol It is sufficient to notify the player of the presence or absence of the promotion to be the probability change state by displaying the effect image different from the above.

  In the definite variation state, for example, displaying an effect image notifying that it is a definite variation state such as "in the case of definite variation" in the display area of the image display device 5, or a display mode of a background image or decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5. By making the display mode different from the display mode in the normal effect mode or the like, the effect mode may be set during the probability change in which the player can recognize that the state is a probability change state. Alternatively, in the definite change state, for example, the player may be unrecognizable or difficult to recognize that the change is in the definite change state (so-called latency change) by being in the same effect mode as the normal state or the short time state. . It is also said that the game state is in the process of being in a latent state during which the latent state is changed.

  During the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, a pre-reading effect is executed which indicates whether or not the variable display in which the variable display result is “big hit” is suspended. As a specific example, in the pre-reading effect, the player's operation on the stick controller 30 (including the operating rod 30A and the trigger button 31A) or the push button 31B is detected during execution of a predetermined round (for example, the fifth round) An effect image indicating the variable display result is displayed based on the input information. At this time, even when execution of variable display in which the variable display result is "big hit" is suspended, or even if the variable display result is "losing", numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is specified as the specific pattern common range. When execution of the variable display within the range of the predetermined range set in advance is suspended, for example, the first effect image among the plurality of effect images is displayed at a higher rate than the second effect image Just do it. Here, the first effect image and the second effect image may have different colors, for example. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing” and the execution of the variable display in which the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 is out of the range of the specific pattern common range is suspended, the second effect image is It may be displayed at a higher rate than the effect image. As a result, depending on which effect image is displayed among the plurality of effect images including the first effect image and the second effect image, the execution of the variable display in which the variable display result is “big hit” is suspended. Can have different expectations.

  Further, at the end of the big hit gaming state, it may be suggested that whether or not the variable display in which the variable display result is “big hit” is suspended depending on whether or not the ending pre-reading effect is executed. As a specific example, in the pre-reading effect at the time of ending, an effect image that suggests a variable display result may be displayed together with an effect image for informing the end of the big hit gaming state. At this time, even when execution of variable display in which the variable display result is "big hit" is suspended, or even if the variable display result is "losing", numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is specified as the specific pattern common range. When the execution of the variable display within the range of the predetermined range set in advance is suspended, the pre-reading effect at the time of ending is a ratio higher than the execution ratio of the normal effect at the time of ending different in the effect mode (content of the effect) Then, the pre-reading effect at the time of ending should just be performed. Alternatively, when execution of variable display in which the variable display result is "big hit" is suspended or when the variable display result is "losing", numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is previously set as the specific pattern common range When execution of the variable display within the defined predetermined range is suspended, the variable display result is “losing” and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type is within the specific pattern common range. The pre-reading effect at the time of ending may be performed at a higher rate than the case where only the execution of the variable display that is out of the range is suspended. Between the pre-reading effect at the time of ending and the normal effect at the time of ending, for example, the color of the effect image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 may be made different, and so on. In this way, depending on which of the pre-reading effect at the end and the normal effect at the end is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, the variable display result becomes "big hit" the degree of expectation for which the execution of the variable display is suspended It can be different.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, a voice control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 3 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 2 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure The variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control. The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. And various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric parts for presentation such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 produces effects such as all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 L, 8 R, all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9 etc. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the purpose to execute a predetermined rendering operation.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, lighting / extinguishing the game effect lamp 9 etc. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called, for example. It is sufficient if it has. In addition, the main substrate 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a common view hold indicator 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The main board 11 is provided with, for example, a main board connector corresponding to the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass signals only in the direction from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15, and blocks input of signals from the relay substrate 15 to the main substrate 11. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the side of the effect control board 12 or the relay board 15 to the main board 11 side.

  For example, a transmission direction restriction circuit may be provided on the relay substrate 15 for each of the wirings for transmitting the control signal from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. In each transmission direction control circuit, the anode is connected to the main substrate connector corresponding to the main substrate 11 and the diode whose cathode is connected to the effect control substrate connector corresponding to the effect control substrate 12 and one end is connected to the cathode of the diode And the other end of the resistor is connected to ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction control circuit can block the input of the signal from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the side of the effect control board 12 to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction control circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector in the main board 11. Can prevent the input of an illegal signal from the outside to the main substrate 11.

  The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 A lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like is included. FIG. 5A is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is an ornament that is variably displayed in each of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. It is a change pattern specification command which specifies a change pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second fluctuation start commands and the fluctuation pattern designation command are prepared as separate effect control commands. On the other hand, it is configured so that specification contents of which one of the first special drawing and the second special drawing is to start fluctuation and specification contents of fluctuation pattern can be specified by one effect control command. It is also good. As an example, an effect control command is prepared in which the EXT data is set corresponding to the combination of the special symbol (first special figure or the second special figure) that starts the change and the change pattern, and the effect control command It is possible to be able to specify the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern that are the start of fluctuation. Here, when it is configured such that the special symbol that is the start of fluctuation and the fluctuation pattern can be identified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special character that is the start of fluctuation for one fluctuation pattern) There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if the effect control command for designating the special symbol to start fluctuation and the effect control command for designating the fluctuation pattern are separately prepared, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol to start fluctuation And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of fluctuation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. For example, in the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 5B, for example, the variable display result is either "presence" or "big hit", and the variable display result is "big hit". If the jackpot type in the case is "15R non probability variation" 15R non probability variation big hit, "15 R probability variation" 15 R probability variation big hit, "16 R probability variation" corresponding to the big hit classification result of which is either 16 R probability variation big hit , Different EXT data are set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a result of the prior determination that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "15R non-probability change" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "15R definite variation" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating the result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "16R definite variation" and the big hit type determination result.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate effect control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command may be configured to be identifiable by one effect control command. As an example, prepare a production control command in which the EXT data is set according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result (either “losing” or “big hit” and the big hit type in the “big hit” case) Alternatively, information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by one effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results with respect to one fluctuation pattern. You may need to prepare control commands. On the other hand, if the effect control command for specifying the variation pattern and the effect control command for notifying the variable display result are separately prepared, the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of fluctuation pattern, and the variable display result The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command which designates stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time saving state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is set as the first gaming state specification command corresponding to the normal gaming state, and the command 9501H is a high probability high base in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed in the gaming state being the definite variation state The second game state specification command corresponding to the state, and the third game state specification command corresponding to the high probability low base state (during a latency change) that the command state 9502H is a game state is a definite change state and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed The command 9503H may be set as a fourth game state specification command corresponding to the case where the game state is the short time state.

  In this embodiment, the decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as an effect control command for designating the stop of the variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, transmission of the decorative symbol stop command may not be performed. In this case, on the side of the effect control board 12, the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern or the like indicated in the fluctuation pattern designation command is specified, and the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command is received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure fluctuation time, even if the effect control command from the main substrate 11 is not received, the setting for ending the effect to be executed corresponding to the special figure game is performed. You should be made to be known.

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot start designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command is set, etc., so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening for notifying that it is a period in which the special winning opening has changed from the opening state to the closing state in the big hit gaming state. In the special winning opening open notification command and the special winning opening after open notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “16”) in 15R big hit state or 16R big hit state, for example Be done. In the jackpot gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning mouth is changed from the opening state to the closing state, from the start of the big hit gaming state, Alternatively, a continuous rendering operation may be executed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the jackpot gaming state. Alternatively, in the big hit gaming state, whether it is a period when the big winning opening is in the open state, or whether it is a period when the big winning opening has changed from the opening state to the closing state, or the number of times the big winning opening is in the opening state Depending on (the number of times of execution of the round), different rendering operations may be performed.

  The command A3XXH is a big hit end designation command for specifying the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state. In the jackpot end designation command, different EXT data is set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command or the jackpot start designation command. Alternatively, in the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command or the jackpot start designation command. .

  The first special symbol is displayed based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the device 4A is established. Command B2XXH is a second special symbol based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning has occurred. It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in display 4B was satisfied.

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening winning combination designation command notifies the determination result using the predetermined numerical data at the time of the first starting winning at the time of detection of the gaming ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening. It is also used as an effect control command. In addition, the 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command, the production control command which notifies the decision result which uses specified numerical data at the time of 2nd starting winning a prize which is the time of detection of the game ball which has passed (entered) the 2nd starting winning a prize opening. It is also used as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, in the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning combination designation command, a predetermined determination numerical value used to determine whether or not the variable display result is "big hit" For example, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, and a decision value corresponding to the "big hit" as the variable display result (for example, in the special figure display result of Different EXT data are set according to whether or not the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" based on the assigned determination value). More specifically, the commands B100H and B101H and the commands B200H and B201H notify that the variable display result is not determined to be determined as "big hit", while the commands B102H and B202H are variable. In the case where it is determined that the display result is determined to be a "big hit", the "hit winning jackpot determination" is notified.

  Further, in the first start opening winning combination designation command and the second start opening winning combination designation command, when the variable display result is "loss", a predetermined variable display determination numerical value (for example, random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern type determination Whether the determination of the specific variation pattern has been made based on the indicated numerical data) and the determination value (for example, the determination value included in the specific pattern common range) corresponding to the specific variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern with super reach) Depending on, different EXT data is set. More specifically, the command B100H and the command B200H are "outside of the specific pattern common range" when it is not determined that the random value MR3 is outside the range of the specific pattern common range and the specific variation pattern is determined. While notifying, the command B101H and the command B201H notify "within the specific pattern common range" when it is determined that the random value MR3 is within the specific pattern common range and is determined as the specific variation pattern. .

  The command C0XXH displays the number of first special figure holding memories and the second special drawing in order to display the number of special drawing holding memories in an identifiable manner in the start winning memory display area 5H or the like provided in the display area of the image display device 5 It is a special figure pending storage number notification command for notifying of the total pending storage number which is a total value with the pending storage number. For example, in the special figure reservation storage number notification command, execution of the special figure game is performed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied or the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Following the transmission of either the first starting opening winning combination designation command or the second starting opening winning combination designation command in response to being started, etc., the main substrate 11 is transmitted to the effect control substrate 12 Ru. In the special-pattern suspension storage number notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to, for example, the total storage number (for example, “0” to “8”) of suspension data in special-image suspension storage unit 151A shown in FIG. Thereby, on the side of the effect control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, execution of the special view game is performed. For example, when the special pattern hold storage number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the total number of hold data of the hold data in the special view hold storage unit 151A (total hold storage number of variable display) is calculated. It can be identified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the gaming control microcomputer 100 may have at least a built-in RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or built-in. The random number circuit 104 and the I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, since the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform game control, the game control microcomputer 100 (or the CPU 103) executes Specifically, “perform processing” means that the CPU 103 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate different from the main substrate 11.

  In the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 or the like counts up numerical data representing various random number values used to control the progress of the game. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special display result, a random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random number value MR5 for determining the common pattern display result is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect.

  The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of the random values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the MR 5 may be counted. As an example, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for special view display result determination is updated by the random number circuit 104 independently of the CPU 103, and other numerical data indicating random number values MR2 to MR5 is a random counter by the CPU 103. It should just be updated by software using. Further, by executing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data representing all or part of the random values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, the predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the gaming control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the gaming control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by performing this operation is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result is a random number used to determine whether or not the variable display result such as the special symbol in the special view game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit". It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65535". The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is one of “15R non-probability change”, “15R probability change”, and “16R probability change”, which is a big hit type that is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”. Is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" ~ Takes a value in the range of "251". The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, for example, "1" to It takes a value in the range of 997 ". The random number value MR5 for determining the common drawing display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the common drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per common drawing" or "general drawing loss". It is a random number value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of “3” to “13”. In other words, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the regular drawing game. It is used to determine whether or not to change the gaming ball from the normal open state) to a state (expanded open state) where it is easy for the game ball to pass (enter).

  FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" or "reach", respectively. Among the cases where the display result is "big hit", a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is "non-probability change" or "probability change". In addition, the change pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss fluctuation pattern") and variable The variation pattern corresponding to the display result of "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol being "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to fluctuation patterns PA1-4 are prepared in advance as non-reach fluctuation patterns. In addition, as reach variation patterns, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation The pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. As a hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit", variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PA4-2, variation pattern PB4-1, variation pattern PB4-2, variation pattern PA5-1, variation The pattern PA5-2, the variation pattern PB5-1, and the variation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance.

  FIG. 8 shows the variation pattern types in this embodiment. Each fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 7 is included in at least one fluctuation pattern type among the plurality of fluctuation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or more variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, a rendering operation performed during variable display of a decorative symbol. As an example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are classified (grouped) according to reach effect types (rendering modes), and fluctuation patterns including a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not reach reach, and fluctuation with normal reach It may be divided into a variation pattern type in which a pattern is included and a variation pattern type in which a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, a plurality of variation patterns are classified (grouped) according to the presence / absence of variable display effects of “pseudo series” and the number of times of execution of pseudo series fluctuation (re-variation), and variable display effects of “pseudo series” are executed A variation pattern type including a variation pattern including no variation pattern, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern in which the number of times of execution of pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is one in the variable display effect of “pseudo series”, “pseudo series” It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern in which the number of times of execution of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is two or more in the variable display effect of. Furthermore, as another example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as "simulated reams" and "slip", or variable display time of a decorative symbol. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8, fluctuation pattern types CA 1-1 to fluctuation pattern types CA 1-3 are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. There is. Further, fluctuation pattern types CA2-1 to fluctuation pattern types CA2-3 are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of "reach". Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit", fluctuation pattern types CA3-1 to fluctuation pattern types CA3-3 are prepared in advance.

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of "no shortening" in which the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not shortened, and variable display effects such as "simulated link" and "slip" are not executed. , And includes variation patterns PA1-1 associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA1-2 is a variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which variable display effects such as “pseudo series” and “slip” are not performed because the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative pattern is shortened. It includes the associated fluctuation pattern PA1-2. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of "slip, pseudo run" in which variable display effects of "pseudo run" and "slip" are executed when the variable display mode is "non-reach", It includes variation patterns PA1-3 and variation patterns PA1-4 associated with each other.

  When the variation pattern type CA2-1 is accompanied by a normal reach effect that becomes a normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without the variable display effect of “pseudo series” being performed, the reach effect is ended The variation pattern type of “normal reach (loss) pseudo run-free” for deriving and displaying the finalized decorative design of the reach combination on and includes the variation pattern PA2-1 and the variation pattern PA2-2 associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo series” is executed, and after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state, with the normal reach, when the reach effect is finished, the determined decorative pattern of reach combination Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (loss) pseudo connection present” that is derived and displayed, and includes a variation pattern PB2-1 and a variation pattern PB2-2 associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA2-3 is a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state regardless of whether or not the variable display effect of “pseudo series” is executed. Is a variation pattern type of "super reach (loss)" that derives and displays the finalized decoration pattern of the reach combination when the reach effect is finished, and variation pattern PA3-1 and variation pattern PA3-2 associated in advance. , Fluctuation pattern PB3-1, and fluctuation pattern PB3-2.

  Fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 is accompanied by a normal reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is made reach state without the variable display effect of “pseudo series” being executed, and when the reach effect is finished, the determined decoration of the big hit combination This is a variation pattern type of "normal reach (big hit) no-simultaneous absence" for deriving and displaying symbols, and includes a variation pattern PA4-1 and a variation pattern PA4-2 associated in advance. Fluctuation pattern type CA3-2 is executed with variable display effect of “pseudo series”, and after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to reach state, with normal reach, when the reach effect is finished, the determined decorative symbol of the big hit combination Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo connection present” that is derived and displayed, and includes a variation pattern PB4-1 and a variation pattern PB4-2 associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA3-3 is accompanied by a super reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state regardless of whether or not the variable display effect of “pseudo series” is executed, and the reach effect is ended. Is a variation pattern type of "Super reach (big hit)" that derives and displays the fixed decoration pattern of the big hit combination, and the variation pattern PA5-1, the variation pattern PA5-2, the variation pattern PB5-1, the variation pattern associated in advance It contains PB5-2.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used to control the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Also, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 11 and a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. Table data etc. which constitute a fluctuation pattern table are stored.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the special view display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. In the special figure display result determination table 130, when the first start condition for permitting the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, or in the second special symbol display device 4B Before the finalized special symbol that will be the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) of the special symbol is derived and displayed when the second start condition that allows the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol is satisfied. It is a table to be referred to in order to determine whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (compared to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the time reduction state or the definite variation state The determined value is assigned to either the "big hit" or the "losing" special map display result. In this embodiment, whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B Regardless, the special drawing display result is determined with reference to the same special drawing display result determination table 130. On the other hand, in the case of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, and in the case of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Correspondingly, a decision table may be prepared in which assignment of decision values to the special map display result is different.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The big hit type determination table 131 determines the big hit type “15 R based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type when it is determined (predetermined) to control the big hit gaming state with the special view display result as the“ big hit ”. It is a table to be referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as "non-deterministic variation", "15R definite variation", and "16R definite variation". In the jackpot type determination table 131, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to a jackpot type such as "15R non-probability", "15R non-prediction", or "16R probability change" .

  In the big hit classification determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of kinds of big hit classification, the determination result whether to control 15R big hit state or 16R big hit state, or after the end of the big hit gaming state It is data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control the gaming state to a definite change state. For example, the table data indicating the determination value assigned to the jackpot type of "15R non-probability change" or "15R non-probability" corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the 15R big hit state, while the big hit type of "16R probability change" The table data indicating the determination value assigned to each corresponds to the determination result that the 16R big hit state is controlled. Moreover, while the table data indicating the determination value assigned to the jackpot type of “15R non-probability variation” corresponds to the determination result of not controlling in the probability variation state, the jackpot type of “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation” The table data indicating the decision value assigned to each indicates the decision result of controlling to the probability variation state. The big hit type determination table 131 is the value of the big hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (big hit type buffer value), a value corresponding to the determined big hit type (for example, any of "0" to "2") Table data (setting data) for setting to may be included.

  In this embodiment, the mode of execution of the round in the big hit gaming state (the number of times of execution and the opening of the big winning opening is determined by determining the big hit type as any of a plurality of types with reference to the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. The time, etc.) and whether or not to control in a positive change state are collectively determined. In addition, it is not limited to what these are determined collectively, You may make it determine each separately. For example, after determining the jackpot gaming state as either 15R jackpot state or 16R jackpot state based on numerical data indicating a random number value for round determination, a numerical value indicating a random number value for determination result or probability change control decision It may be determined whether or not to control in a positive change state based on data or the like. When the big hit gaming state is determined to be the 16R big hit state, the determination to control the positive change state may be always performed. On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state is determined to be the 15R big hit state, it may be determined whether to control to the positive change state according to numerical data or the like indicating a random number value for positive change control determination. Thus, instead of the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, numerical data indicating a random value for round determination and numerical data indicating a random value for determining probability variation control may be used. .

  One or both of the execution mode (the number of times of execution and the opening time of the big winning opening etc.) of the round in the big hit gaming state, and whether or not to control to the definite change state, random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination It may be determined based on numerical data shown. For example, in the special figure display result determination table 130, when it becomes a special figure display result of "big hit", the decision value is for the decision result of whether the big hit gaming state is either 15R big hit state or 16R big hit state. It may be assigned. Alternatively, in the special figure display result determination table 130, when the special figure display result of "big hit" is obtained, the decision value is allocated to the decision result of "non-probable variation big hit" or "probable variation big hit". It may be done. Alternatively, in the special figure display result determination table 130, when the special figure display result of "big hit" is obtained, the decision values are assigned to a plurality of big hit types, and the big hit type is determined using only the random value MR1. It may be determined.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A and a lost variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132B shown in FIG. 11B as variation pattern type determination tables. A lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (in time saving) 132C shown in FIG. 11 (C) is prepared in advance.

  When it is determined (predetermined) that the special pattern display result is "big hit", the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A changes the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the big hit type, It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A, the judgment result of the jackpot type is compared with the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern type determination depending on whether it is "15R non probability variation", "15 R probability variation" or "16 R probability variation". The value to be determined (decision value) is assigned to any of the fluctuation pattern types CA3-1 to the fluctuation pattern types CA3-3. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A, the determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each fluctuation pattern type is different depending on which of plural types the jackpot type is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is "15R non-probability", "15R non-probability" or "16R probability", assignment of the determination value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3 is It is different. As a result, it is possible to make the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type different according to the determination result as to which of the plural types the jackpot type is to be made.

  In addition, depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined, there may be a portion to which the determination value is assigned to the different fluctuation pattern type. For example, when the big hit type is "16R positive variation", the determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type different from the case where the big hit type is "15R non-positive variation" or "15R positive variation". . In this setting, when the big hit type is 16R big hit according to “16R positive variation”, it is decided that the variation pattern type is different from the case where it is controlled to 15R big hit state, and it is unique when it is 16R big hit state Reach production etc. can be performed.

  Also, when the jackpot type is determined to be "15R non probability variation", "15R probability variation", or "16R probability variation", the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a time saving state. The assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type may be made different depending on the type. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of game states it is. Also, when the jackpot type is determined to be "15R non probability variation", "15R probability variation", or "16R probability variation", the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a time saving state. The decision value may be assigned to different fluctuation pattern types depending on the situation. Thereby, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to which of the plurality of types of game states.

  The lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (time reduction) 132C are determined (predetermined) when the special figure display result is determined to be "lost". 8 is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B is selected as the use table, for example, when the gaming state is the normal state. On the other hand, the lost variation pattern type determination table (in time saving) 132C is selected as a use table, for example, when time shortening control (time saving control) is performed in the time saving state or the probability variation state. When no time saving control is performed in the positive change state, the loss change pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B may be selected as the use table.

  In the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (during the short time) 132C, according to the number of special drawing reservations stored as the total reserved memory count, random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern type determination and The numerical values (decision values) to be compared are assigned to any of the fluctuation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 and the fluctuation pattern types CA2-1 to the fluctuation pattern types CA2-3. In the lost variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the lost variation pattern type determination table (during time) 132C, determination values are assigned to each variation pattern type so that the rates determined for the respective variation pattern types are different from each other. There is a part that Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be made different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the short time state, or the probability change state. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (during the short time) 132C, there may be portions where decision values are allocated to different fluctuation pattern types. Thereby, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  In this embodiment, by referring to either the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B or the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (during time) 132C, the fluctuation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1- It can be determined to be 3 or any of fluctuation pattern types CA2-1 to fluctuation pattern types CA2-3. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the fluctuation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are the fluctuation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode is "non-reach". It is. The fluctuation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are fluctuation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode is "reach". Therefore, based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern type is determined with reference to the lost variation pattern type determination table (normally) 132B or the lost variation pattern type determination table (during time) 132C. It can be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is to be the reach state.

  FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of the fluctuation pattern determination table 133 stored in the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern determination table 133 is a table referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern as any one of a plurality of types based on the random pattern value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type. In the fluctuation pattern determination table 133, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination are allocated to one or more fluctuation patterns according to the fluctuation pattern type.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply, a part or all of which is created on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the data corresponding to the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special map process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 13, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 13 is a special view reserve storage unit 151A, a general drawing reserve storage unit 151B, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, and a game control counter setting unit A game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided.

  Special game reserve storage unit 151A, the first start winning condition occurs by the game ball passing (enter) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, the first start condition is satisfied, but the first start condition The reserve ball of the special figure game which has not been established (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B The second start condition is satisfied but the second start condition is not satisfied by the passage of the entry (entry) and the occurrence of the start-up winning, but the second start condition is not satisfied (the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used Store the pending data of the special drawing game). As an example, the special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the detection order of the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the first by passing (entering) the gaming balls (1) A random number value MR1 for determination of a special display display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the start condition or the second start condition Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR3 is stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “8”). A predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") is previously set for each of the stored number of pending data based on the winning on the first start winning opening and the stored number of pending data based on the winning on the second starting winning opening. It should be determined.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port has passed (entered) by the gaming ball is also included in the hold data, and is associated with the hold number. It is stored in the diagram storage unit 151A. As an example, special view reserve storage unit 151A, "first" starting opening data indicating a winning to the first starting winning opening, or "second" starting opening data indicating a winning to the second starting winning opening The game numbers are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of each game ball.

  It should be noted that the suspension data based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the second starting condition by the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening The pending data based on the establishment of may be stored in a separate pending storage unit in association with the pending number. In this case, a starting opening data storage unit for storing the starting opening data in association with the holding numbers according to the winning order of each gaming ball is provided, and the starting condition is satisfied for the special drawing game corresponding to each holding data. It may be possible to specify the order of execution.

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 151B stores the held information of the common drawing game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the gaming ball that has passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151B determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR5 for use as storage data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special drawing process flag, a common drawing process flag, a big hit flag, a definite change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The special drawing process flag indicates the progress of the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. In the special symbol process processing shown in step S15 of FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 executed for control, it is instructed which processing should be selected and executed. The common drawing process flag selects and executes which processing should be selected in the normal symbol process processing shown in step S16 of FIG. 21 in order to control the progress of the common drawing game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20. To direct.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination (predetermination) that the special figure display result is to be the "big hit" when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a determined special symbol in the special figure game, the big hit flag is cleared and it is turned off. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, while it is cleared in response to the termination of the probability change state or the like to be in the off state . The time saving flag is set to the on state in response to the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becoming a time saving state or a probability changing state and the time shortening control etc. being started, while the time shortening control in the time saving state or the probability changing state is It is cleared in response to termination etc., and is turned off.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure fluctuation timer, a common drawing fluctuation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time to control the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main substrate 11 side. As a specific example, the gaming control process timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state as a gaming control process timer value, and counts down periodically. It is used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as the start time point of the big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure fluctuation timer is for measuring the time to control the progress of the special figure game, such as the variable display time of the special symbol in the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time), on the side of the main board 11 . As a specific example, the special figure fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time to be measured to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value, and counts down periodically. It is used as a counter. Alternatively, the special view fluctuation timer may be used as an up-counter which stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special view game and counts up periodically.

  The common drawing fluctuation timer is for measuring the time to control the progression of the common drawing game, such as the variable display time of the ordinary symbol in the common drawing game (common drawing fluctuation time), on the main substrate 11 side. . As a specific example, the common drawing fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time to be measured to control the progression of the common drawing game, as the common drawing fluctuation timer value, and counts down periodically. It is used as a counter. Alternatively, the common drawing fluctuation timer may be used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the common drawing game and counts up periodically.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first starting winning determination counter, a second starting winning determination counter, a first holding storage number counter, a second holding storage number counter, and a total holding storage number counter. , A time reduction counter, a round number counter, etc. are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 separately from the random number circuit 104 or a part of numerical data indicating a random number used to control the progress of the game. The data is used by the CPU 103 to count updatable by software. For example, numerical data indicating random number values MR2 to MR5 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and each randomness periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numeric data representing numbers is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal, which is a detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start opening switch 22A, is on. belongs to. For example, whenever it is determined that the signal state of the first starting winning signal from the first starting opening switch 22A is on, the stored value in the first starting winning determination counter is incremented by one. Then, when the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball having entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is normally detected. A determination is made. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal is off, or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached, etc. It may be initialized to "0".

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal, which is a detection signal for gaming balls transmitted from the second start opening switch 22B, is on. belongs to. For example, whenever it is determined that the signal state of the second start winning signal from the second start opening switch 22B is on, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. And, when the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches the predetermined winning determination value, the game ball having entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally detected The judgment of is made. In addition, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal is off or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached, etc. It may be initialized to "0".

  The first reserve storage number counter is for counting a first special view retention storage number, which is the number of reserve data corresponding to the special view game using the first special view. For example, count value data corresponding to the number of first to-be-stored storages is stored as the first number of to-be-stored storages count value in the first to-be-stored storage number counter. It is updated (for example, one addition or one subtraction). The second reserve storage number counter is for counting a second special view reserve storage number which is the number of reserve data corresponding to the special view game using the second special view. For example, count value data corresponding to the second special view pending storage number is stored as a second pending storage number count in the second pending storage number counter, corresponding to increase / decrease of the second special view pending storage number It is updated (for example, one addition or one subtraction). The total pending storage number counter is for counting the total pending storage number which is the sum of the first special view pending storage number and the second special view pending storage number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total pending storage number is stored in the total pending storage number counter as the total pending storage number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) corresponding to increase or decrease of the total pending storage number ).

  The time reduction number counter is for counting the number of remaining times of the special figure game that can be executed before the time reduction control is finished when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the time reduction state. As an example, data indicating the initial count value "70" corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being "0" is set as the clock time count value in the time saving number counter when the big hit gaming state ends. . Thereafter, until the variable display result is “big hit”, the count value of the time saving count is decremented by one every time the special figure game is finished, and so on. Then, when the time saving count value reaches “0”, control is performed to end the time saving state and shift to the normal state by clearing the time saving flag and turning it off. It should be noted that time reduction control may be ended when the number of times of execution of the special figure game has reached a predetermined number of times even in the definite variation state. In this case, regardless of the jackpot type buffer value, when the jackpot gaming state ends, after setting the count initial value in the time reduction counter, the special figure game is performed until the variable display result is "big hit". Each time the process is completed, the time count value may be updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, when the time saving count value reaches “0”, the time shortening control may be ended by clearing the time saving flag and turning it off.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of times of execution of a round game or the like in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating the count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. Then, when one round game ends and the next round game is started, the round number count value is incremented by one and updated.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a starting opening buffer, a variation special feature designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the control board on the sub side. For example, the transmission command buffer is configured to include a plurality of (for example, "12") buffer areas, and setting data indicating a storage address in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. Ru. Further, in the transmission command buffer, a buffer area for writing and reading setting data may be designated by a transmission command pointer or the like so that a plurality of buffer areas can be used as a ring buffer.

  In the starting opening buffer, a buffer value is stored which indicates which one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the gaming ball has been detected. As an example, "1" is set to the starting opening buffer value in response to the fact that the gaming ball entering the first starting winning opening is normally detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. Further, "2" is set as the starting opening buffer value in response to the fact that the gaming ball entering the second starting winning opening is normally detected by the second starting opening switch 22B.

  The variation special figure designation buffer is either the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value is stored that indicates whether the special view game is to be executed. As an example, "1" is set to the variation special figure designation buffer value corresponding to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 4A. Further, "2" is set as the variation special figure designation buffer value in response to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B being executed. Then, in response to the end of the special view game, the variation special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The jackpot type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to the determination result of making the jackpot type any of a plurality of types when the variable display result is "big hit". As an example, based on the setting in the big hit type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 10, if the big hit type is “15R non-probability change”, “0” is set for the big hit type buffer value, and the big hit type is “15R probability change” If "", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "1", and if the jackpot type is "16R definite variation", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "2".

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, etc., and the random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, the effect control CPU 120 may be built in the effect control microcomputer, while at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the effect control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may also be built in or externally attached to the effect control microcomputer. The effect control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14 is connected.

  Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring or push for transmitting from the trigger sensor 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's instruction operation (push and pull operation) to the trigger button 31A has been detected. Wiring for transmitting, from the push sensor 35B, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's instruction operation (press operation) to the button 31B has been detected, the player's instruction operation to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that (the tilt operation) has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 32 is also connected. In addition, the effect control board 12 is connected with a wire for transmitting a drive control signal to the blower fan 33, a wire for transmitting a drive control signal to the vibration motor 34, and the like.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation is counted by the random number circuit 124 or the like in an updatable manner. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number. FIG. 14 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, the random number value SR1 for determining the preread effect type, the random value SR2 for determining the initial position for notification, and the selection pattern for determining the notification Random number SR3, random number SR4 for pre-reading decision at the end, random number SR5-1 for operation effect determination, random value SR5-2 for operation initial position determination, random value SR6 for big hit decision effect determination, notice Numerical data representing each of the effect determination random number values SR7 is controlled to be able to be counted. In addition, random number values other than these may be used in order to enhance the rendering effect. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for final stop symbol determination used to determine a finalized symbol (final stop symbol) to be a variable display result of the decorative symbol may be controlled so as to be countable.

  The random number value SR1 for the prereading effect type determination determines whether or not the effect operation to be the prereading effect is to be executed, and if it is determined to be executed, the prereading effect type in any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. It is a random value used to make a decision. As an example, random number value SR1 for pre-reading effect classification determination takes the value of the range of "1"-"400".

  When making it possible to select a notification target by operating the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30, the random value SR2 for determining the notification target initial position randomly determines the initial position of the notification target. Is a random value used for As an example, random number value SR2 for broadcast target initial position determination takes the value of the range of "1"-"200".

  The random number value SR3 for determining the notification object selection pattern indicates a selection procedure of the notification object according to the number of operations when the notification object can be selected according to the number of operations of the push button 31B or the like in the prereading effect. It is a random value used to determine the notification target selection pattern as any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. As an example, random number value SR3 for alerting | reporting object selection pattern determination takes the value of the range of "1"-"300".

  The random value SR4 for ending reading determination is used as an ending effect to be executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, to determine whether or not to execute ending reading effect based on hold data of variable display It is a random value. As an example, the random value SR4 for ending prefetch determination is in the range of “1” to “150”.

  The random number value SR5-1 for determining the operation effect is used to determine the effect mode (content of effect) as any of a plurality of modes prepared in advance, when the operation effect is executed as a reach effect for super reach. It is a random value. As an example, random number value SR5-1 for operation production determination takes the value of the range of "1"-"201".

  The random number SR5-2 for determining the initial position of the operation target randomizes the initial position of the operation target when operating the effect part to be the operation target by operating the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 in the operation effect Is a random value used to determine the As an example, the random value SR5-2 for determining the operation target initial position takes a value in the range of "1" to "297".

  The random number value SR6 for determining the big hit finalization effect is a random number value used to decide whether to execute the staging operation to be the big hit finalization effect, and to determine the execution timing of the effect when it is decided to execute. is there. As an example, the random number SR6 for determining the jackpot determination effect takes a value in the range of "1" to "401".

  The random number value SR7 for determining the advance effect determines whether or not to execute the effect operation to be the advance effect, and determines the effect mode (content of the effect) in any of a plurality of modes prepared in advance when it is determined to be executed. Is a random value used to As an example, random number value SR7 for advance announcement production determination takes the value of the range of "1"-"501".

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM 121, a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations, and settings by the effect control CPU 120, table data forming the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.) The effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is configured of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern fluctuation effect control pattern and various effect control patterns may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed It is composed of data indicating control contents of various rendering operations, such as a variable display operation of a decorative pattern and an effect display operation in reach effect, or various effect display operations without a variable display of the decorative pattern. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  FIG. 15A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 15A, the effect control pattern is, for example, process data including effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, etc. It is configured.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the effect control process timer value which is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main substrate 11, or that a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control may be set according to the predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating an audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating an output mode such as a sound effect interlocked with a variable display operation of an ornamental pattern during variable display of an ornamental pattern. There is. That is, the voice control data is data designating a voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the lighting operation of the light emitter.

  The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation valid period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A, or an instruction for the push button 31B. Indicates a rendering operation mode according to the player's operation such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation (pressing operation) or data specifying control content of the rendering operation when each operation is effectively detected. Data is included. In addition, for example, when the rendering operation using the stick controller 30 is executed, the operation detection control data causes the vibration motor 34 built in the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 to drive the operating rod 30A to vibrate. It may include data specifying the control content of the operation, data specifying the control content of the rendering operation for blowing air toward the control rod 30A of the stick controller 30 by driving the blower fan 33, and the like. Here, the blowing vibration effect including the rendering operation of vibrating the control rod 30A by the drive of the vibration motor 34 and the rendering operation of blowing air toward the control rod 30A by the drive of the blower fan 33 is, for example, the control rod of the stick controller 30 Operation detection control data or the like may be set so as to be started in response to detection of a predetermined operation action, such as detection of an instruction operation (tilt operation) to 30A. Alternatively, the blowing vibration effect is started, for example, when the operation effect using the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30 or the trigger button 31A is performed, while the operation is restricted when the operation effect using the push button 31B is performed ( Operation detection control data may be set so as to be prohibited.

  The blowing vibration effect is performed as a predetermined effect operation that can be recognized by the player only when an instruction operation is performed on one of the operation means such as the stick controller 30 and the stick controller 30 of the push buttons 31B. In addition, the predetermined effect operation that the player can recognize only when performing an instruction operation to any of the plurality of operation means is not limited to the blowing vibration effect, for example, the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 It may be an optional rendering operation such as a rendering operation that can be recognized only when the player touches the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 by cooling or heating from the inside. Further, instead of the blowing vibration effect on the stick controller 30, the blowing vibration effect on the push button 31B may be executed. That is, a predetermined effect operation is performed that enables the player to recognize only when performing an instruction operation on any one of the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B, and an operation effect using the one operation means The predetermined effect operation may be limited when the predetermined effect operation is started when the operation effect using the other operation means different from the predetermined effect operation is performed.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting the process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation performed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, and there may be process data configured to include a part of these. Furthermore, various other control data may be included, such as model control data for effect indicating an operation mode of the movable member included in the model for effect.

  FIG. 15B shows various rendering operations performed in accordance with the content of the rendering control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, control is made to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is made to blink a light emitter such as the gaming effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp control data, Operation of the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B of the stick controller 30 or the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is received in the operation valid period designated by the detection control data to determine the contents of presentation, drive of the blower fan 33 or vibration motor Control is performed to determine the content of the effect by the drive of 34. Note that dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to a component for effect that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on, for example, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command when starting variable display of the decorative pattern. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern may be configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the Thus, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamps according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the light emitter such as 9th, the blower fan 33, the vibration motor 34, etc. is advanced. In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control contents of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and an effect for designating execution of the effect control Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

  An instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in the VRAM. Further, in the voice control board 13 receiving the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 16A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state. The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, for example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like is provided with a prize determination result buffer 200 as shown in FIG. 16 (B). In the prize determination result buffer 200, the contents of notification by the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 are stored. As an example, the winning a prize determination result buffer 200 is associated with the storage number in the order in which the first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command are received (the order of detection of gaming balls). "" In the "specific pattern common range", "notice of winning when winning determination", such as starting opening information indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (enter) Are stored as pending storage information.

  FIG. 17 shows a configuration example of the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 stored in the ROM 121 and the like. The prefetching effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A determines whether or not to execute the prefetching effect based on the hold data of the variable display, or the content of the effect of the prefetching effect in the case of executing It is a table referred to in order to decide the pre-reading effect classification according to) as either of a plurality of classifications. In the preread effect type determination table 140, according to the result of checking the memory contents of the in-winning determination result buffer 200 (in-prize determination result buffer stored content check result), it is compared with the random value SR1 for the preread effect type determination. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned to either no pre-reading effect for which pre-reading effect is not performed or to any of pre-reading effect type CS1 to pre-reading effect type CS3. As a result of the judgment of winning result buffer memory contents, there is a holding result of "holding in winning judgment" including holding memory information indicating the judging in winning, and there is no holding memory information showing the judgment in winning, and the specific pattern is common. Judgment result of “within specific pattern common range” including pending storage information indicating within the range, and “other than above” judgment result indicating other than this (such as when all pending storage information indicates outside the specific pattern common range) There is.

  FIG. 17 (B) shows effect contents in the pre-reading effect according to each pre-reading effect type determined using the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17 (A). In this embodiment, an effect operation using the stick controller 30 (including the operating rod 30A and the trigger button 31A) is executed in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1. In the pre-reading effect type of pre-reading effect type CS2, using the push button 31B, an effect operation in which the effect mode (content of the effect) changes in accordance with the continuous operation (continuous hitting operation) is executed. In the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS3, an effect operation using both the stick controller 30 (including the operating rod 30A and the trigger button 31A) and the push button 31B is executed.

  In the setting example of the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A, the determination value is assigned such that the determination ratio of each pre-reading effect type is different according to the result of the winning determination result buffer storage content check. There is a part that For example, when the winning combination determination result buffer storage content check result is “in winning determination at winning determination”, more decision values are allocated to the preread effect type CS1 than in the other check results. On the other hand, when the winning combination determination result buffer storage content check result is “in winning determination at winning determination”, the determined value assigned to the pre-reading effect type CS2 is smaller than in the case of other check results. There is. Therefore, when the rendering operation as the first operation effect using the stick controller 30 is executed as the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1, the push button 31B is used as the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 It is more likely that holding storage information indicating the winning determination will be stored in the winning determination result buffer 200, as compared to when the rendering operation serving as the second operation effect is executed. Thereby, when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 using the stick controller 30 is executed, the big hit game compared to when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 using the push button 31B is performed After the end of the state, the display result in the variable display which has been suspended becomes a "big hit" and the sense of expectation to be in the big hit gaming state again is enhanced.

  In the setting example of the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A, there is a portion to which a determination value is assigned to different pre-reading effect types according to the result of the winning determination result buffer storage content check. For example, the determination value is assigned to the preread effect type CS3 only when the winning combination determination result buffer storage content check result is "in winning determination hit determination". Therefore, when the rendering operation to be a combined operation effect using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is executed as the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS3, the pending memory information indicating the winning judgment is the time of winning It is determined that the determination result buffer 200 is stored. Thereby, when the preread effect of the preread effect type CS3 using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is executed, the display result in the variable display held after the end of the big hit gaming state is "big hit" And it is informed that it will be a big hit gaming state again.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the notification target initial position determination table 141 stored in the ROM 121. The notification target initial position determination table 141 is a notification target to be notified of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 or the prereading effect type CS3 is executed. Is a table to be referred to in order to determine the initial position of R based on the random number value SR2 for determining the initial position to be notified. Here, the notification target of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is that the first starting condition and the second starting condition are satisfied because the gaming ball passes the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. However, any variable display may be selected from among the variable displays which are suspended without the first start condition and the second start condition being satisfied. The initial position of the notification target is a variable display which is first selected as the notification target when the prereading effect type CS1 or the prereading effect type CS3 is started, and stored in the prize determination result buffer 200 It may be specified by the memory number associated with the determined result. In the preread effect of the preread effect type CS1 or the preread effect type CS3, the selection of the variable display to be notified is changed according to the instruction operation (tilt operation) of the player to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or the like. I wish I could.

  In the notification target initial position determination table 141, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR2 for the notification target initial position determination is assigned to the notification target initial storage number according to the determination result storage number maximum value. . The determination result storage number maximum value indicates the maximum value of the storage number associated with the valid determination result (determination result corresponding to the pending variable display) stored in the prize determination buffer 200. That is, the determination result storage number maximum value may be the same value as the total pending storage number. The notification target initial storage number indicates the storage number of the determination result corresponding to the variable display that is the initial position of the notification target. In the notification target initial position determination table 141, the determination value is assigned to the notification target initial storage number which is equal to or less than the determination result storage number maximum value. By determining the notification target initial storage number using the notification target initial position determination table 141, it is possible to determine variable display to be the initial position of the notification target so as to be different at a predetermined ratio.

  FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 stored in the ROM 121 and the like. The notification object selection pattern determination table 142 shown in FIG. 19A sets the notification object selection pattern to be used when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 is executed to the random value SR3 for notification object selection pattern determination. It is a table referenced to determine one of a plurality of patterns based on the above. In the notification object selection pattern determination table 142, according to the result of checking the stored content of the winning determination result buffer 200 (winning result determination result buffer storage content check result), it is compared with the random value SR3 for determining notification object selection pattern. Numerical values (decision values) are assigned to a plurality of notification target selection patterns.

  FIG. 19B shows a setting example of each notification target selection pattern determined using the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 shown in FIG. 19A. In this embodiment, in the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2, the number of times (the number of times of operation) at which the player continuously instructs the push button 31B (pressing operation to be the continuous hitting operation) is detected When the notification execution determination value determined for each time is reached, a rendering operation is performed to notify the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display to be notified. The notification object selection pattern defines notification execution determination values for each notification object storage number. The notification target storage number indicates the storage number in the winning determination buffer 200 of the determination result corresponding to the variable display to be notified. In this embodiment, when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 is started, the notification target storage number is set to “1”, and the number of times of operation reaches the notification execution determination value, and the variable display becomes the notification The selection of the notification target may be changed by adding 1 to the notification target storage number after the possibility of becoming a "big hit" is notified.

  In the setting example of the notification object selection pattern determination table 142 shown in FIG. 19 (A), the determination value is assigned such that the determination ratio of each notification object selection pattern is different according to the result of the storage contents check at the time of winning There is a part that For example, when the winning combination determination result buffer storage content check result is “in winning determination at winning determination” or “within the specific pattern common range”, only the reserved storage information indicating the outside of the specific pattern common range is “above More decision values are assigned to the notification target selection pattern HSP2 than in the case of “other than”. On the other hand, the determination value assigned to the notification target selection pattern HSP1 is “when the result in the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is“ in the winning determination at winning result ”or in the“ specific pattern common range ”. It is less than in the case other than the above. As shown in FIG. 19B, in the notification target selection pattern HSP1, the notification execution determination value when the notification target storage number is “1” to “3” is larger than that of the notification target selection pattern HSP2. It is defined in Therefore, when the pending storage information indicating the winning combination determination or the pending storage information indicating the inside of the specific pattern common range is stored in the winning combination determination result buffer 200, compared to when the pending storage information is not stored. Notification of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be easily performed with a small number of operations. Thereby, when notification of the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" is performed with a small number of operations in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2, a large number of operations is performed before the notification is performed. Compared to when it is required, the display result in the variable display that has been suspended after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes a "big hit" and the sense of expectation that the big hit gaming state will again be realized, and the sense of expectation that the reach effect of super reach is executed And so on.

  In the setting example of the notification object selection pattern determination table 142 shown in FIG. 19A, there is a portion where a determination value is assigned to different notification object selection patterns according to the result of the storage content check at the time of winning. For example, the determination value is assigned to the notification target selection pattern HSP3 only when the winning combination determination result buffer storage content check result is "in winning determination hit determination". As shown in FIG. 19B, in the notification target selection pattern HSP3, the notification execution determination value is extremely small, particularly when the notification target storage number is “1” or “2” (specifically, “ It is determined to be 3 "). Therefore, when notification of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is performed with extremely small number of operations in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2, the pending memory information indicating the winning judgment is the time of winning It can be recognized by the player that the determination result buffer 200 is stored, that is, the display result in the variable display which has been suspended after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes the "big hit" and becomes the big hit gaming state again Will be informed.

  FIG. 20 shows a configuration example of the ending pre-reading effect determination table 143 stored in the ROM 121. Based on the random number value SR4 for ending pre-reading effect determination, it is determined whether or not the ending pre-reading effect is executed when the big hit gaming state ends, when the ending pre-reading effect decision table 143 is performed. Is a table referred to by In the ending look-ahead presentation effect determination table 143, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value SR4 for the ending look-ahead effect determination according to the result of the determination of the result in the winning combination buffer storage contents check It is assigned to the decision result of presence / absence of pre-reading effect at the time of ending such as no effect.

  In the setting example of the ending look-ahead presentation effect determination table 143 shown in FIG. 20, a decision value is assigned so that the determination ratio of the presence or absence of a look-ahead effect at the time of ending varies according to the result of the storage contents check at the time of winning There is. For example, when the winning combination determination result buffer storage content check result is “in winning determination at winning determination” or “within the specific pattern common range”, only the reserved storage information indicating the outside of the specific pattern common range is “above More decision values than in the case of “other than” are assigned to the decision result with effect that executes pre-reading effect at the end. Therefore, when the pending storage information indicating the winning combination determination or the pending storage information indicating the inside of the specific pattern common range is stored in the winning combination determination result buffer 200, compared to when the pending storage information is not stored. , Ending pre-read effect is easier to be performed. Thereby, when the pre-reading effect at the time of ending is executed, the pre-reading effect at the time of ending is not executed but compared with the time when the normal effect is executed at the time of ending, the variable display in the suspended state after the big hit gaming state ends. The display result is a "big hit" and the feeling of expectation that the big hit gaming state will be made again, the feeling of expectation that the reach effect of the super reach is executed, etc. are enhanced.

  FIG. 21 shows a configuration example and the like of the operation effect determination table 144 stored in the ROM 121. The operation effect determination table 144 shown in FIG. 21A is a table that is referred to, for example, to determine one of a plurality of types of effect contents (effect mode) of the operation effect to be executed as a reach effect of super reach. is there. In the operation effect determination table 144, for example, according to the operation item buffer value which is a storage value of the operation item buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, etc. The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value SR5-1 is allocated to any of the operation effect A-1, the operation effect A-2, the operation effect B, the operation effect C-1, and the operation effect C-2. It is done. The operation item buffer value is set to “1” or “2” based on the setting or the operation history of the player. When the operation item buffer value is “1”, the stick controller 30 is selected as the operation item. When the operation item buffer value is "2", the push button 31B is selected as the operation item.

  FIG. 21B shows an operation item as an operation member for effectively detecting an instruction operation by the player with an operation effect determined using the operation effect determination table 144 shown in FIG. 21A. In this embodiment, in the operation effect A-1, the result of the variable display is obtained based on the injection being a single instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B using the push button 31B. The rendering operation is performed to notify the possibility of the "big hit". In the operation effect A-2, the variable display result is based on the fact that the continuous shooting (continuous hitting), which is a plurality of continuous pointing operations (pressing operations) on the push button 31B, is performed using the push button 31B. A rendering operation is performed to notify of the possibility of a "big hit". In the operation effect B, using the stick controller 30, based on the instruction operation (tilt operation) to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30, notification of the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit", etc. The rendering operation to be performed is executed. In the operation effect C-1, the stick controller 30 is used to change the effect contents (rendering mode) in response to an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30, and the operation for one of the trigger button 31A is performed. Based on the fact that a single shot which is an instruction operation (push and pull operation) is performed, an effect operation is performed to notify that the variable display result may be a "big hit" or the like. In the operation effect C-2, using the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B, the contents of the effect (in response to an instruction operation (tilt operation) to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or an instruction operation (press operation) to the push button 31B. Based on the fact that the single shot that is a single instruction operation (push and pull operation) to the trigger button 31A is performed while changing the effect mode), the possibility of the variable display result becoming a "big hit" etc. is notified A rendering operation is performed.

  In the setting example of the operation effect determination table 144 shown in FIG. 21 (A), there is a portion where the determination value is assigned to different operation effects according to the operation item buffer value. For example, when the operation item buffer value is "1", the decision value is assigned to the operation effect B or the operation effect C-1, while the operation item A-1 or the operation effect A-2 is assigned. The decision value has not been assigned. When the operation item buffer value is “2”, the decision value is assigned to the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect A-2, while the operation item B and the operation effect C-1 are assigned. The decision value has not been assigned. Therefore, when the operation item buffer value is “1”, determination to selectively execute the operation effect B using the stick controller 30 or the operation effect C-1 is performed, and the operation effect A using the push button 31B is performed. The decision to execute 1 or the operation effect A-2 is limited. On the other hand, when the operation item buffer value is "2", determination to selectively execute the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect A-2 using the push button 31B is performed, and the stick controller 30 is used. The decision to execute the operation effect B or the operation effect C-1 is limited.

  In the setting example of the operation effect determination table 144 illustrated in FIG. 21A, there is a portion to which a determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio of each operation effect differs according to the variable display mode. For example, when the operation item buffer value is “1”, when the variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “reach”, more decision values are obtained than in the other variable display modes. , Is assigned to the operation effect B. By such setting or the like, it is possible to make the sense of expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” different according to which operation effect is executed.

  In the setting example of the operation effect determination table 144 shown in FIG. 21 (A), there is a portion where the determination value is assigned to different operation effects according to the variable display mode. For example, only when the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display mode is "non-probability change" or "probability change", the determination value is set for operation effect C-2 using both stick controller 30 and push button 31B. Is assigned. Therefore, when the operation effect C-2 which is a combined operation effect using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is executed, it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit". Thus, when the operation effect C-2 using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is executed, it is definitely notified that the display result in the variable display being executed will be a "big hit".

  FIG. 21C shows a configuration example of the operation target initial position determination table 145 stored in the ROM 121. The operation target initial position determination table 145 is an operation target to be operated by an instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 when the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2 is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine initial position based on random value SR5-2 for operation target initial position determination. Here, the operation target by the instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is, for example, a predetermined effect image (a effect image indicating an aim, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 It may be any one that can operate (move) according to the direction in which it is made. The initial position of the operation target is an operation position (display position) at which the operation target is first disposed when the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2 is started, and, for example, the display area of the image display device 5 It is only necessary to be selectively determined from a plurality of display positions predetermined in advance. In the operation effect C-1 and the operation effect C-2, the operation position (display position) of the effect image or the like to be operated is changed according to the instruction operation (tilting operation) by the player to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 I wish I could do it.

  In the operation target initial position determination table 145, the upper left position PL1, the left middle position PL2, the lower left position PL3, the middle upper position PC1, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR5-2 for operation initial position determination. A plurality of operation positions (display positions), such as a center position PC2, a middle lower position PC3, an upper right position PR1, a right middle position PR2, and a lower right position PR3, are assigned. By determining the operation target initial position using such an operation target initial position determination table 145, the initial position of the operation target can be determined to be different at a predetermined ratio.

  FIG. 22 shows a configuration example of the big hit fixed effect determination table 146 stored in the ROM 121 and the like. A big hit determined effect determination table 146 shown in FIG. 22 (A) determines whether or not to execute a big hit determined effect that announces that the variable display result will be a "big hit" or not. It is a table referred to in order to decide the kind of decision production. In the big hit finalization decision table 146, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR6 for the big hit finalization decision is no finalization effect that does not execute the big hit finalization effect, or the big hit final effect SP1 ~ big hit final effect SP4 Assigned to one of them.

  FIG. 22B shows the execution timing of the big hit determination effect determined using the big hit determination effect determination table 146 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the execution timing of the rendering operation is made different depending on which of the big hit finalized effect SP1 to the big hit finalized effect SP4 is to be executed. The big hit finalization effect is, for example, a flash operation to light a predetermined flash lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 disposed in the gaming machine frame 3 for a short time, or an operation to output a predetermined sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is only necessary to be able to definitely notify that the variable display result is a "big hit" by performing one or both or the like. In this embodiment, the big hit finalization effect SP1 is executed at the start of the change of the decorative pattern or the like. The big hit finalization effect SP2 is executed at the time of reach establishment when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state. The jackpot decision effect SP3 is executed when an initial instruction operation on the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B is detected, when the operation effect is executed as a reach effect of super reach. The big hit determination effect SP4 is executed along with the execution of the achievement effect informing that the variable display result is the “big hit” in the operation effect when the operation effect is executed as the reach effect of the super reach. As described above, the big hit determination effect SP3 and the big hit determination effect SP4 are executed at the execution timing related to the instruction operation to the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B when the operation effect is executed as the reach effect of the super reach. It should just be set.

  FIG. 23 shows an example of the configuration of the notice effect determination table 147 stored in the ROM 121. In the notice effect determination table 147 shown in FIG. 23A, it is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect for giving notice of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", etc. Is a table referred to in order to determine In the notice effect determination table 147, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR7 for the notice effect determination according to the type of the change pattern is no notice not performing the notice effect or notice effect YPA1 to notice effect Assigned to one of YPA4. In addition, it is not limited to what a decision value is allocated according to the kind of fluctuation pattern, but a decision value may be allocated according to an individual fluctuation pattern, and according to a variable display result or a variable display mode A decision value may be assigned.

  FIG. 23 (B) shows notification contents in the notice effect determined using the notice effect determination table 147 shown in FIG. 23 (A). In this embodiment, one of the notice effect YPA1 to the notice effect YPA4 is selected according to the operation notification content which is the content of the message notified in response to the instruction operation to the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B of the stick controller 30. It is set to be selectively executable. That is, any of the notice effect YPA1 to the notice effect YPA4 may be any as long as the notice effect "advance notice at the time of operation" is executed.

  In the setting example of the advance notice effect determination table 147 shown in FIG. 23A, there is a portion to which a determination value is assigned so that the determination rate of each advance notice effect differs according to the type of fluctuation pattern. For example, most notice values are assigned to the notice effect YPA in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and it is determined according to the reach fluctuation pattern with normal reach, the reach fluctuation pattern with super reach, and the big hit fluctuation pattern. It is set to reduce the value assignment. With such settings, depending on which preview effect is executed, the sense of expectation that the variable display result will be "big hit", the sense of expectation that the variable display state of the decorative pattern will be reach state, reach effect of super reach The sense of expectation to be executed can be made different.

  In the setting example of the advance notice effect determination table 147 shown in FIG. 23A, there are portions to which a determined value is assigned to different advance notice effects according to the type of fluctuation pattern. For example, while the determination value is not assigned to the preliminary presentation effect YPA4 in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, the determination value is assigned to the other in the other variation pattern. As a result, when the notice effect YPA 4 is executed, it is determined that at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state. It should be noted that there is provided a notice effect or the like to which a decision value is assigned only when the variable display result is "big hit", and when the notice effect is executed, the display result in the variable display being executed will be "big hit". May be decided.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control instruction from the effect control CPU 120 and the like. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing variable display of decorative symbols or various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 or the like. As an example, the display control unit 121 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing which is more generally referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or any of non-volatile recording media such as a magnetic memory and an optical memory. It may be configured.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, various effects such as effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, operation detection signals transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A, the push sensor 35B, the tilt direction sensor unit 32 and the like. It is comprised including an input port for taking in a signal, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. For example, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, an instruction (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and an instruction transmitted to the lamp control board 14 from the output port of the I / O 125 A (electric decoration signal), a drive control signal transmitted to the blower fan 33, a drive control signal transmitted to the vibration motor 34, and the like are output.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplification circuit, a volume, and the like. As an example, in the voice control board 13, sound number data indicated by the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The speech synthesis IC generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound to the amplification circuit. The amplification circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level according to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads the control data according to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The storage data of the voice data ROM may be constituted of data indicating the output mode of voice and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electric decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 24 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step S13).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc. After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, effect control After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 24 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIGS. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first reads input port data stored in a predetermined input port register (step S201 in FIG. 26). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating an input state of an external signal at an input port included in the I / O 105 is stored. In this embodiment, the input state of the first start winning signal (off / on) in which the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 22A. ), And the input state of the second start winning signal (off /) in which the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is a detection signal of the gaming ball transmitted from the second starting opening switch 22B. On).

  It is determined whether the bit value in the bit number [1] of the input port register read out in step S201 is "1" (step S202). At this time, if the bit value is "1" (step S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value, which is the storage value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, is It updates so that it may count up by adding 1 etc. (step S203). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S202 that it is "0" (step S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0". (Step S204).

  After one of the processes in steps S203 and S204 is executed, it is determined whether the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in step S201 is "1" (step S205). At this time, if the bit value is "1" (step S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value, which is the storage value of the first start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, is It updates so that it may count up by 1 addition etc. (step S206). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that it is "0" (step S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared, and the stored value is initialized to "0". (Step S207).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S206 and S207, it is determined whether the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, "2") predetermined as a winning determination value. (Step S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S208; Yes), the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, It is set to "1" (step S209). Also, the first start winning determination counter is cleared, and its count value is initialized to "0" (step S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in step S208 (step S208; No), the winning of the effective game ball to the first start winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A It is determined whether the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value in response to the absence of the command (step S211). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value (step S211; No), the winning of the effective game ball to the second start winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B In response to the absence, the start winning determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the second start-up winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211; Yes), the starting opening buffer value is set to "2" (step S212). Also, the second start winning determination counter is cleared, and its count value is initialized to "0" (step S213).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S210 and S213, the CPU 103 reads out the pending storage number count value according to the starting opening buffer value (step S214). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first holding storage number count value which is the storage value of the first holding storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read out, and the starting opening buffer value is When it is "2", the second hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the second hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, is read out. Then, it is determined whether the read value in step S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") (step S215 in FIG. 27). At this time, if the read value in step S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the start condition for starting variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 26 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, if it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, 1) A special drawing game using the first special drawing by the special symbol display device 4A, and a first start condition for performing variable display of a decorative symbol are satisfied. When it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value after it is determined in step S211 shown in FIG. 26 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, 2) A special drawing game using a second special drawing by the special symbol display device 4B and a second start condition for executing variable display of a decorative symbol are satisfied.

  As described above, when the read value does not reach the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; No), the pending storage number count value corresponding to the starting opening buffer value is incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, and when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter indicating the total pending storage number, which is the total value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number Step S217).

  Subsequent to the process of step S 217, the CPU 103 selects, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, the random number MR 1 for determining the special view display result, the random number MR 2 for determining the big hit type, and the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for type determination is extracted (step S218). Each random number value is stored by setting numerical data representing each random number value extracted in this manner as the reserve data at the top of the empty entry in the special figure reserve storage unit 151A (step S219). At this time, the start port buffer value is also included in the hold data as the start port data, and is set at the top of the empty entry in the special view hold storage unit 151A.

  After storing the random number value in step S219, a winning random number value determination process is executed (step S220). Subsequently, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by, for example, storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for setting is performed (step S221). For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. It is transmitted.

  If the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; Yes) or after the processing in step S221, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2". It determines (step S222). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step S222; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S223), as shown in FIG. The process proceeds to step S211 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S222; "2"), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S224), The start winning determination process ends.

  In this embodiment, when both of the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning combination of the effective gaming ball, both processing can be performed within 2 milliseconds. A process is executed based on the fact that the switch has detected a start winning for a valid game ball. In other words, when it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 26 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing in steps S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. 26 after executing the process of step S223 in response to the start port buffer value being "1" in step S222 after the process of steps S215 to S221 shown in FIG. Proceed to processing. When it is determined in step S211 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing in steps S212 to S214 shown in FIG. 26 is performed, and then steps S215 to S221 shown in FIG. After executing the process of step S224, the process of step S224 is performed in response to the value of the starting opening buffer value being "2" in step S222, and the start winning determination process is then ended. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a starting winning combination of valid gaming balls, it is possible to surely complete the processing based on the detection of both starting starting winning combinations.

  FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process performed in step S220 of FIG. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result is set as the "big hit" in the special symbol normal processing (step S110 of FIG. 25, FIG. 30) described later. The decision on whether to control or not, and the decision on the jackpot type are performed. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of step S220 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Thus, it is specified in advance whether the special view display result is a random number MR1 determined to be a "big hit" or a random value MR3 determined to be a specific variation pattern with super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball entering the start winning opening is started, the special view display result becomes "big hit", and it becomes a specific fluctuation pattern with super reach. Based on the prediction result, it is possible to determine on the side of the effect control board 12 whether or not to execute pre-reading effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like.

  In the prize random number value determination process shown in FIG. 28, first, CPU 103 specifies a special figure display result according to numerical data indicating random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in step S218 in FIG. (Step S401). For example, in the process of step S401, the special chart display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 9 is selected and set in the use table. Here, when setting in the use table, the storage address (head address) of table data in the ROM 101 may be set, for example, in a table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. Subsequently, by referring to the special chart display result determination table 130 set in the use table, it is determined whether the special chart display result is determined to be the "big hit" according to the random value MR1 extracted in step S218. It is identified. More specifically, the special data display to which the determination value matching the random value MR1 is assigned by comparing the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 with the determination value stored in the special drawing display result determination table 130. Identify whether the result is a "big hit". Here, regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is "big hit," referring to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state in the special drawing display result determination table 130. It may be specified whether or not The numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination extracted in the step S218 in FIG. 27 is the numerical value for decision in which the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" by the process of step S401. It is determined whether or not it is.

  Following the process of step S401, it is determined whether the specified special-image display result is a "big hit" (step S402). At this time, if the specified special map display result is "big hit" (step S402; Yes), it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S403). Then, when the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S403; "1"), a command B102H serving as a first starting opening winning combination designation command for notifying "winning determination at winning" is selected (FIGS. After C) is set to transmit from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 (step S404), the winning random number value determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the starting opening buffer value is "2" at step S403 (step S403; "2"), a command B202H serving as a second starting opening winning combination designation command for notifying "winning detection at winning" is performed. After the settings for transmitting (see FIGS. 5A and 5C) from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 are made (step S405), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  If the special view display result in step S402 is not "big hit" (step S402; No), the numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern type extracted in step S218 in FIG. It is determined whether it is within the range of the common range (step S406). Here, in the setting example of the lost variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B shown in FIG. 11B and the lost variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, if the random number value MR3 for determining the special pattern fluctuation pattern type is in the range of "230" to "251", the fluctuation pattern with at least the super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is It is determined to be included in the variation pattern type CA2-3. Therefore, in the process of step S406, for example, as shown in FIG. 29, if the random number value MR3 is in the range of “230” to “251”, it may be determined to be in the range of the specific pattern common range. That is, CPU 103 sets random number value SR3 to one of identical determination values “230” to “251” set in at least a part of the determination value corresponding to change pattern type CA2-3 including the change pattern with super reach. By determining whether or not to match, it is possible to determine whether or not a variation pattern with super reach is determined.

  When it is determined in step S406 that the random number MR3 is within the specific pattern common range (step S406; Yes), it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S407). ). Then, when the starting opening buffer value is “1” (step S 407; “1”), a command B 101 H serving as a first starting opening winning combination designating command for notifying “in specific pattern common range” (FIG. 5A and After setting for transmitting (C) (see (C)) from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 (step S408), the winning random number value determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the starting opening buffer value is "2" at step S407 (step S407; "2"), a command B201H serving as a second starting opening winning combination command for notifying "within the specific pattern common range". After setting for transmitting (see FIGS. 5A and 5C) from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 (step S409), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S406 that the random number MR3 is out of the specific pattern common range (step S406; No), it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S410). ). Then, when the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S410; "1"), a command B100H serving as a first starting opening winning combination designation command for notifying "out of the specific pattern common range" (FIG. 5 (A) and After setting for transmitting (C) (see (C)) from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 (step S411), the winning random number value determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the starting opening buffer value is "2" in step S410 (step S410; "2"), a command B200H serving as a second starting opening winning combination designation command notifying "out of the specific pattern common range" After setting for transmitting (see FIGS. 5A and 5C) from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 (step S412), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state in pachinko gaming machine 1 in the process of step S401, referring to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state in special figure display result determination table 130 , It is specified whether the special view display result is "big hit". On the other hand, the change of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be predicted, and the table data to be referred to in the special-image display result determination table 130 may be switched based on the prediction result. As an example, if the probability change control is continuously performed until the variable display result is “big hit”, it is determined that the special view display result is determined to be “big hit” in step S402, as shown in FIG. By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 on the basis of the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type extracted in step S218 of FIG. And "16R definite variation" is determined. Then, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not "15R non probability change" but "15R probability change" or "16R probability change", the probability change time determination flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is set to the on state . On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is “15R non-probability change”, the probability change time determination flag is cleared to be in the off state. Then, in the process of step S401, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is on or off. At this time, if the probability change time determination flag is on, whether the special view display result is a "big hit" by referring to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the definite change state in the special view display result determination table 130 Identify whether or not. On the other hand, when the probability change time determination flag is off, it is sufficient to refer to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state in the special figure display result determination table 130. By executing such processing, etc., the normal state corresponding to the case where the gaming state at the time the special drawing game based on the holding data stored in the special drawing holding storage unit 151A is started is a definite change state The special chart display result can be specified using table data in which the special chart display result is determined to be a "big hit" at a higher rate than in the time saving state or time saving state, and it is more accurate in conformity with the actual gaming state Can identify the special map display result.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 28, after the determination based on the random number MR1 and the random number MR3 is performed in the process of step S402 and the process of step S406, the starting opening is determined by the processes of steps S403, S407 and S410. It is determined whether the buffer value is "1" or "2". Alternatively, the determination based on the random number value MR1 or the random number value MR3 may be performed after the determination of the starting opening buffer value is performed first.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. Execute the process

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, whether to start the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B based on the presence / absence of the suspension data stored in the special image suspension storage unit 151A, etc. It is determined whether or not it is not. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" is the variable display result Make a decision (pre-decision) before being displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, the finalized special symbol (big hit symbol, in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B Missing symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a process of deciding the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types based on the pre-decision result of whether or not the variable display result is to be a "big hit", and the decision result of the variation pattern type And the process of determining the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by 1 or incremented by 1 1 Regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer Measurement of elapsed time is performed. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of step S112 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special feature in the second special symbol display device 4B. It is sufficient that the processing of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the figure is performed by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop process, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It includes the process of setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, etc. If the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Do. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the variable display result becoming "big hit", etc., the process of performing the setting for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening include. At this time, the number of times the special winning opening is opened may be set, or the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening may be opened may be set. As an example, when the jackpot type is controlled to the 15R jackpot state corresponding to the "15R non-probability change" or "15R probability change", the upper limit of the period to open the big winning opening is "29 seconds" The number of opening of the special winning opening (maximum number of opening of the special winning opening), which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round, is set to “15”. On the other hand, when being controlled to the 16R big hit state corresponding to the big hit type being "16 R definite variation", while setting the upper limit of the period which makes the big winning a prize opening state to "29 seconds" ,, set the maximum winning opening opening number of times to "16".

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, the process of setting for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting corresponding to a period in which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the gaming effect lamp 9, etc. The process includes a process of waiting until time elapses, a process of performing various settings for controlling to a probability change state or a time saving state corresponding to the jackpot type, and the like.

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 103 first determines whether the total number of pending storages is "0" (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  When the total number of pending storages is other than "0" at step S231 (step S231; No), the special data is stored as the pending data stored in association with the pending number "1" in the special view pending storage unit 151A. The random number value MR1 for display result determination, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, and the starting opening data are read out (step S232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S232, the total pending storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the total pending storage number count value, for example. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 and the like stored in the entries lower than “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted upward by one entry (step S233) . At this time, it is determined whether the starting opening indicated by the starting opening data included in the pending data read in step S232 is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S234 that it is the first start winning opening (step S234; "1"), for example, the first special view reserve storage is performed by subtracting 1 from the first reserve storage number count value, etc. The number is updated to be decremented by 1 (step S235). At this time, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to "1" (step S236).

  When it is determined in step S234 that it is the second start winning opening (step S234; "2"), for example, the second special storage reserve storage is performed by subtracting the second reserve storage number count value by one, etc. The number is updated to be decremented by 1 (step S 237). At this time, the value of the variation special feature designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S238).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S236 and S238, the special table display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is used as a use table for determining whether to set “big hit” or “losing”. The figure display result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S239). The CPU 103 refers to the special drawing display result determination table 130 set in this way, and the numerical data indicating the special drawing display result determination random number value MR1 stored in the variation random number buffer is “big hit” or “loss”. In accordance with which one of the determination values assigned to each of the special map display results of “” matches, the special map display result is determined to be “big hit” or “losing” (step S240). At this time, it is determined whether the special map display result determined in step S240 is a "big hit" (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S241 that the "big hit" is made (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is “15R non-probability”, “15R non-probability”, “16R Determine whether the jackpot type is “15R non-probability change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change” according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of “probability change” matches (step) S244). Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the jackpot type determined Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "15R non-probability", the big-hit type buffer value is set to "0", if "15R probability change", "1", if "16R probability change", "2" .

  If it is determined in step S241 that the game is not a "big hit" (step S241; No) or after the process of step S245 is executed, the result of the predetermination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, In response to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state, the determined special symbol is set (step S246). As an example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" in step S241, the special figure display result is "loss" in response to the pre-decision result indicating that the "loss" is made. A special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special view display result is "big hit" in step S241, "3", "5", and the big hit symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S244. One of the special symbols showing the number "7" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "15R non-probability", a special symbol indicating the number of "3" that is 15R non-probability jackpot symbol is set as the determined special symbol. In addition, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "15R definite variation", a special symbol indicating the number of "5" to be the 15R definite variation big hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "16R positive variation", a special symbol indicating the number of "7" which is a 16R positive variation big hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol.

  After setting the finalized special symbol in step S246, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S247), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. . If the total number of pending storages is "0" at step S231, after performing predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), the special symbol normal processing is ended. In this demonstration display setting, for example, a presentation control command (waiting customer demonstration designation command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, etc. It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern type to any of a plurality of types (step S262) ). Further, for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified which of the “15 R non probability change”, “15 R probability change” or “16 R probability change” is the jackpot type. (Step S263).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), for example, it is determined whether the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not, the time saving state or the probability changing state It is determined whether or not the time shortening control or the like is being performed in time (step S 264). At this time, if it is not during time saving (step S 264; No), the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132 B is selected as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. It sets (step S265). On the other hand, when the time is short (step S264; Yes), the lost change pattern type determination table (during the time) 132C is selected as a use table for determining the change pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. And set (step S266).

  After one of the processes in steps S263, S265, and S266 is executed, it is set in the use table based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer or the like. The variation pattern type is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern type determination table (step S 267). Here, in the process of step S267, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special drawing game executed using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the satisfaction of the first start condition Whether to decide or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special drawing game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition Alternatively, the common processing module may determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a common random value MR3 for determination of a fluctuation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. it can.

  In the lost change pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B shown in FIG. 11 (B) and the lost change pattern type determination table (time reduction) 132 C shown in FIG. 11 (C) In this case, more decision values are allocated to the variation pattern type CA1-2, as compared to the case where the number of special map reservations is less than the predetermined number. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B, the variation pattern is different from the case where the number of special view reservations is less than "3" when the number of special views suspension storage is "3" or more. When a large number of decision values are assigned to type CA1-2, and the number of special map holding memories is "6" or more, the number of special drawing holding memories is less than "6". Thus, many decision values are assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-2. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (time reduction) 132C, when the number of special map reservations is "1" or more, compared with the case where the number of special views reservation memories is "0" less than "1," When a large number of decision values are allocated to fluctuation pattern type CA1-2 and the number of special figure holding memories is "2" or more, the number of special drawing holding memories is less than "2" and In comparison, many decision values are assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-2. The variation pattern type CA1-2 has a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter as compared with the variation pattern PA3-1 with variation, the variation pattern PA3-2, the variation pattern PB3-1, and the variation pattern PB3-2 with super reach. As variation pattern PA1-2 is included. Therefore, when the special view display result is "losing", the special view when the start condition (the first start condition or the second start condition) is satisfied, the number of special view storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. The variation pattern type is determined using a decision value in which the number of decision values corresponding to the variation pattern PA1-2 is set larger than when the number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number. In this way, it is possible to vary the average time to change the special map fluctuation time according to the number of special drawing reservations stored when the start condition is satisfied, and in particular when the number of special drawings reserved memory is a predetermined number or more. By shortening the fluctuation time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation rate of the variable display is reduced as much as possible.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S267, the variation pattern determination table 133 is selected, and the variation pattern is set as a use table for determining any of a plurality of types (step S268). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table set in step S268 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination (step S269). Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 when the process of step S269 is executed, or the first start winning combination The game balls that have passed (entered) the mouth and the second start winning opening are stored as holding data in special view holding storage unit 151A along with random numbers MR1 to MR3 that are extracted at the start winning detection when the game ball is detected. It is also good.

  In the process of step S269, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special drawing game executed using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the satisfaction of the first start condition, A common random regardless of whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special drawing game is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B using the second special drawing based on the establishment of the second start condition A common processing module can determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types by using numerical data indicating a common random value MR4 for determination of a variation pattern updated by a counter or the like. Further, in the process of step S269, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S267, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by the common processing module using numerical data indicating a common random value MR4 for determination of variation patterns. It can be decided either.

  After the variation pattern is determined in step S269, a special figure variation time which is a variable display time of a special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step S270). Thereafter, according to the variation special view designation buffer value, the special view game using the first special view in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special view game using the second special view in the second special symbol display device 4B In order to start any of the above, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed (step S271). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S271, setting for transmitting various commands used for the start of variation of the special symbol is performed (step S272). For example, when the fluctuation special view designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to issue a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 In order to transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command sequentially, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance. In the transmit command buffer stored in the buffer area specified by the transmit command pointer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to issue a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 In order to sequentially transmit a notification command and a pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer Store in the area. When the setting in step S272 is performed, the main substrate 11 transmits the effect control substrate 12 every time the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 24 is performed after the variation pattern setting process is completed. The game state specification command, the first change start command or the second change start command, the change pattern specification command, the variable display result notification command, and the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is first transmitted, the first change start command or the second change start command, the change pattern specification command , And may be transmitted in the order of the gaming state designation command and the pending storage number notification command. Thereafter, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S273), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

  FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 103 first determines whether the special view determination display flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is on (step S291). Here, the special view final display flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S 295 described later, in response to the final display of the final special symbol which is the variable display result in the special view game.

  When the special figure finalization display flag is off at step S291 (step S291; No), setting for deriving and displaying the finalized special symbol is performed (step S292). At this time, the setting for transmitting the symbol determination designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). In addition, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) predetermined as the special view determination display time is set (step S294). For example, in the process of step S294, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the special view determination display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after setting the special figure finalization display flag to the on state (step S 295), the special symbol stop process is ended. Thus, after the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed in the process of step S292, the special symbol process processing according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special view finalization display time set in step S294 elapses. Every time the stop processing is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the flag indicating that the special map final display is on is on.

  If it is determined in step S291 that the flag for displaying special figure confirmation is on (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value which is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294 is read, and whether the timer value becomes "0" or not In accordance with this, it may be determined whether or not the special view determination display time has elapsed. In addition, if the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so as to be decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process for game control is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Just do it. If the special figure determination display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is ended, and the process waits until the special figure determination display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure determination display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after the special figure determination display flag is cleared and turned off (step S297), it is determined whether the big hit flag is on or not. It determines (step S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S298; Yes), a fixed time predetermined as the big hit start effect waiting time is set (step S299). Further, the setting for transmitting the big hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, setting data indicating a storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the big hit start specifying command according to the big hit type buffer value is a send command in the send command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

  Subsequently to the process of step S300, the big hit flag is cleared to turn it off (step S301). Further, the setting for ending the definite change state or the short time state is performed (step S302). For example, as the processing of step S302, processing of clearing a definite change flag or a time saving flag and turning off, processing of clearing a time saving counter for counting the number of remaining times of the special figure game for which time reduction control is executed, etc. Should be performed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S303), the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not to end time shortening control or high open control in a definite change state or a short time state (step S304). For example, in the process of step S304, when the time saving flag is on, the time saving count value which is the stored value of the time saving counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether the updated time reduction count value matches the predetermined time reduction end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if the time saving end determination value is met, the time shortening control or the high open control in the definite change state or the time saving state may be ended by clearing the time saving flag and turning off. On the other hand, if the time saving end determination value is not matched, the state of the time saving flag may be maintained, and the process of step S304 may be ended. In addition, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the time shortening control and the high open control are continued until the next variable display result is "big hit" or until the special figure game is further executed a predetermined number of times. It is also good. Alternatively, when the gaming state is a definite change state, while the time reduction control may be ended by the process of step S304, for the positive change control, until the next variable display result is the "big hit", or predetermined It may be allowed to continue until the special figure game of the number is executed.

  Further, in the process of step S304, for example, numerical data representing a random number value for determination of probability change control end is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability change control end determination stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like Whether to end the probability change control may be determined by referring to a table or when the number of times the special figure game is executed during the probability change control reaches a predetermined probability change end determination value or the like. On the other hand, in the process of step S304, the process for terminating the probability change control may not be executed, and the probability change control may be continued until the variable display result is "big hit" next. Alternatively, the process of determining whether to end the probability change control based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the end of the probability change control determines (predetermines) the special map display result in step S240 shown in FIG. It may be performed before.

  After executing the process of step S304, the special figure process flag is cleared and the value thereof is initialized to "0" (step S305), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the big hit end process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the big hit opening post process of step S116 shown in FIG. 25, when updating the value of the special view process flag to "7", the timer initial value previously determined corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is The game control process timer is set. In this case, in the process of step S321, the game control process timer value is updated, for example, by subtracting 1 and the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time progress determination value (for example, "0"). It may be determined whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed according to whether or not it has been done. If the jackpot end effect waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the jackpot end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has passed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read out (step S322) , Identify whether the jackpot type was "15R non-probability", "15R non-probability", or "16R non-probability". At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is “15R non-probable variation jackpot” corresponding to the case of “15R non-probability change” (step S323).

  If it is determined in step S323 that a 15R non-probable variation big hit has been made (step S323; Yes), setting is made to start control to set the gaming state to the time saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the on state, and sets the initial count value (for example, "70") predetermined corresponding to the upper limit value of the special drawing game executable in the time saving state to the time saving counter. Set to On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "15R positive variation" or "16R positive variation" (step S323; No), the setting to start the control to change the gaming state into a positive variation state (step S325) . For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the on state. In addition, even in the case of the probability change state, the count initial value may be set in the time reduction counter corresponding to the upper limit value of the special view game in which the time reduction control is performed.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S324 and S325, the special process process flag is cleared, and the value thereof is initialized to "0" (step S326), and the big hit end process is ended.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 34 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 occurs separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal serving as an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 Capture The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S74, an effect control process process is performed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decoration light such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, The control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the rendering model, the driving operation of the blower fan 33 and the vibration motor 34, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command etc. transmitted from the main substrate 11 Is done.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, the effect random number updating process is executed (step S76), and random number values counted by the random counter of effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random number values used for effect control. The numerical data shown is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S72.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S74 of FIG. 34 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S501). For example, the effect control command received on the side of the effect control board 12 is stored in the effect control command reception buffer, and the effect control CPU 120 reads the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer and the content is displayed. It is only necessary to be able to specify the received effect control command by confirming.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S501; Yes), display update setting corresponding to the first starting opening winning is performed (step S502). For example, in the process of step S502, one of the display portions which is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 passes through the first start winning opening (enter The display setting for changing to blue display may be performed according to the establishment of the first start condition by the detection of the played game ball).

  If it is determined in step S501 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S501; No), it is determined whether the second starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S503). At this time, if it is determined that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S503; Yes), display update setting corresponding to the second starting opening winning is performed (step S504). For example, in the process of step S504, one of the display portions which is not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 passes through the second start winning opening (enter In accordance with the establishment of the second start condition by the detection of the game ball), display setting for changing to red display may be performed.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S502 and S504, the contents of notification by the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning combination designation command are stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, the EXT data of the first starting opening winning combination designation command or the second starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is used as pending storage information, and the head of the empty entry in the winning determination result buffer 200. The pending storage information may be stored by setting to. At this time, starting opening information corresponding to the MODE data of the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning combination designation command is also included in the pending storage information and set at the top of the empty entry in the winning determination result buffer 200. Just do it.

  When the process of step S505 is executed, the determination result storage number maximum value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S506), and then the command analysis process is ended. For example, in the process of step S506, the determination result storage number maximum value is incremented by 1 by adding 1 to the determination result storage count value which is the storage value of the determination result storage counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Just do it. The determination result storage counter is for counting the storage number of pending storage information in the prize determination result buffer 200, and is notified by the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command, and the prize determination is made. The maximum value of the storage number associated with the determination result stored in the result buffer 200 can be specified by the determination result storage count value.

  If it is determined in step S503 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S503; No), whether or not a variation start command such as a first variation start command or a second variation start command has been received Is determined (step S507). At this time, if it is determined that the change start command has been received (step S507; Yes), for example, the change start command reception flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to the on state (step S508). Further, the storage content of the winning determination result buffer 200 is shifted (step S509). For example, in the prize determination result buffer 200, the pending storage information stored in association with the storage number "1" is deleted, and an entry lower than the storage number "1" (for example, storage numbers "2" to "8") The pending storage information stored in the entry corresponding to “1” is shifted upward by one entry. Then, for example, the determination result storage count value is decremented by 1, or the like, and the maximum value of the determination result storage number is updated by 1 (step S510), and then the command analysis processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S507 that the change start command has not been received (step S507; No), setting according to another command received from main substrate 11 via relay substrate 15 is performed (step S511 ), End command analysis processing.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 34 as the effect control process. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S176 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Do.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". In the variable display start waiting process, variable display of the decorative design in the display area of the image display device 5 is started based on whether or not the first change start command or the second change start command or the like from the main substrate 11 is received. And the like.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the display area of the image display device 5 In order to perform the variable display of the decoration pattern in and various other effect operations, it includes the process of determining the finalized decoration pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbol and the kind of display result etc. .

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative symbol A process for performing various effect control during variable display is included. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" in response to, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol being read out from the special pattern change effect control pattern. Ru.

  The variable display stop process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." This variable display stop processing is a complete stop display (derivation of a finalized decorative symbol as a final stop symbol which is a variable display result of the decorative symbol in response to reception of a symbol determination designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 or the like. Display) is included. Alternatively, in response to the end code being read out from the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern, the finalized decoration symbol may be completely stopped (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command has elapsed, the effect control board 12 side autonomously without the effect control command from the main board 11 It is possible to derive and display the finalized decorative symbol on the final display and to fix the variable display result. In the variable display stop process, the big hit gaming state is based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the determination result of whether or not the big hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, etc. Includes the process of determining whether or not to start. Then, when the big hit gaming state is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, while the big hit gaming state is not started in response to the variable display result corresponding to “loss”, The rendering process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0".

  The jackpot display process of step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". The big hit display process includes a process for executing a big hit notification effect (fanfare effect) for giving notification of the start of the big hit gaming state based on receipt of the big hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 . Then, when the execution of the jackpot notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit, during the effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the big hit gaming state, and causes the display area of the image display device 5 to display an effect image based on the setting contents. Or, by outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, the game effect lamp 9 or decoration by the output of a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Execute various effect control in the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the LED. Further, in the big hit internal effect process, for example, in response to the reception of the big hit end designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "6".

  The jackpot end effect process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and causes the display area of the image display device 5 to display an effect image based on the setting contents. Or, by outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, the game effect lamp 9 or decoration by the output of a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control at the end of the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the LED, is executed. Thereafter, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0".

  FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process executed in step S170 of FIG. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the change start command reception flag is on (step S451). The fluctuation start command reception flag is set to the on state when the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command transmitted from the main substrate 11 are received (see step S508 in FIG. 35). When the first change start command and the second change start command have not been received, and the change start command reception flag is off (step S451; No), it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined operation item selection period. (Step S452). As an example, the operation item selection period is started based on the reception of the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the selection of the operation item It may be ended in response to detection of an instruction operation to instruct. Alternatively, the operation item selection period may be continued until variable display of the decorative design is started if an instruction operation for instructing selection of the operation item is not detected.

  If it is determined in step S452 that the operation item selection period is over (step S452; Yes), effect operation control for executing the operation item selection effect is performed (step S453). As an example, in the process of step S453, according to presentation control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, etc.) read out from the presentation control pattern prepared in advance for executing the operation item selection presentation In order to perform the rendering operation including a part or all of the display of the effect image, the output of the sound effect, and the lighting of the lamp, various commands are created and the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board It may be transmitted to 14 and the like.

  Subsequently to the process of step S453, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (tilt operation) to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 has been detected based on an operation detection signal or the like transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32 (step S454). At this time, if there is no detection of the tilting operation (Step S454; No), detection of an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is performed based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined whether there is any (step S455).

  When the tilting operation is detected in step S454 (step S454; Yes), or when the pushing operation is detected in step S455 (step S455; Yes), for example, provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like. The operation item buffer value, which is the stored value of the operation item buffer, is set to "1" (step S456).

  When no push operation is detected in step S455 (step S455; No), whether or not an instruction operation (push operation) on push button 31B has been detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from push sensor 35B. Is determined (step S457). At this time, if the pressing operation is detected (step S457; Yes), the operation item buffer value is set to "2" (step S458).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S456 and S458, the operation item selection period may be ended (step S459). When it is determined that the operation item selection period is not in step S452 (step S452; No), or when the pressing operation is not detected in step S457 (step S457), or after the process of step S459 is executed After the effect operation control for executing the demonstration display effect is performed (step S460), the variable display start waiting process is ended. As an example, in the process of step S450, various commands are created according to the presentation control execution data read out from the presentation control pattern prepared in advance for executing the demonstration display presentation, and transmitted to the display control unit 123 etc. Thus, control of the rendering operation including the display of the rendering image may be performed.

  When it is determined in step S451 that the fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step S451; Yes), the fluctuation start command reception flag is cleared to be in the off state (step S461). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S462), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  FIG. 38 shows an example of effect display and the like in the operation item selection effect. When it is determined in step S452 shown in FIG. 37 that it is an operation item selection period, in the process of step S453, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 38A is displayed on the display area of image display device 5. By displaying or the like, an effect operation is performed to urge the player to select which operation member of the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is to be used as an operation item. After that, for example, along with the display of the effect image as shown in FIG. 38 (B), an operation detection period for effectively detecting an instruction operation on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, the trigger button 31A, and the push button 31B. Become. When the player performs an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, it is determined that the tilt operation is present in step S454 of FIG. When the push operation is performed, it is determined in step S455 of FIG. 37 that there is an operation on the trigger button 31A, so that the operation item buffer value is set to "1" in step S456. At this time, it may be notified that the stick controller 30 has been selected as the operation item, for example, by displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. 38C. On the other hand, when the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B, it is determined that the operation on the push button 31B is present in step S457 of FIG. The value is set to "2". At this time, different from the effect image shown in FIG. 38C, it may be notified that the push button 31B has been selected as the operation item by displaying the effect image notifying the selection of the push button 31B or the like.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example, and the special view display result is "lost". It is determined whether or not (step S521). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is "loss" (step S521; Yes), for example, it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from main substrate 11 or the like. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is the non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" (step S522).

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop design constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, numeric data indicating a left determined symbol determination random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 in the fixed decorative symbols is determined. Next, numerical data representing a random number for determining a right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like By referring to and the like, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the middle fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The determined fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decoration symbols is determined by referring to the symbol etc.

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining left and right fixed symbols, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table, etc., the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 in the fixed decorative symbol are aligned and stopped and displayed. The symbol number determines the same decorative symbol. Furthermore, numerical data representing a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like By referring to the determined decoration pattern, the determined decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes identical to the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, etc., the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special view display result is not "loss" (step S521; No), the special drawing display result is "big hit", corresponding to the re-lottery effect or the probability change promotion effect Setting for execution is performed (step S525). In the process of step S525, it is determined whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect by, for example, referring to the re-lottery determination table prepared in advance. In the re-lottery determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value for re-lottery rendering execution determination may be allocated to the determination result as to whether or not to execute the re-lottery rendering. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the re-lottery determination table on the basis of, for example, numerical data indicating random number values for re-lottery effect execution determination extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. Determine whether to execute the re-lottery effect. Further, for example, by referring to the probability variation promotion determination table prepared in advance, it is determined whether or not to execute the probability variation promotion effect. In the probability variation promotion determination table, a plurality of probability variation promotion effect patterns prepared according to combinations of probability variation promotion effects to be executed during the big hit gaming state or at the end of the big hit gaming state are compared with random values for determining probability variation promotion effects It is sufficient if a numerical value (decision value) is assigned. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the probability variation promotion determination table based on numerical data indicating random number values for determination of probability variation promotion determination extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 and the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. A decision is made as to whether or not a promotion effect is to be performed, and a probability variation promotion pattern in the case where it is to be performed.

  In the re-lottery determination table, each determination result is different so that the ratio of executing the re-lottery effect is different depending on whether the big hit type is “15R non-probability change”, “15R non-probability change”, or “16R probability change”. It is sufficient if the determined value is assigned to the user. Also, if the jackpot type is "15R non-probability change", as a re-lottery effect, after the temporary stop display of the decorative design that constitutes non-probability variation big hit combination, finally non-probability variation big hit combination due to re-variation etc. By displaying a finalized decorative symbol to be configured, a re-lottery failure presentation is performed to notify that the probability change promotion has failed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "15R positive variation" or "16R positive variation", the decoration pattern that constitutes the non-probable variation big hit combination is temporarily displayed as a re-lottery effect, and then finalized by re-variation etc. A re-lottery success effect may be executed to inform that success in the probability change promotion has been achieved by deriving and displaying a definite decoration pattern that constitutes the probability change big hit combination on. Alternatively, even if the jackpot type is "15R definite change" or "16R definite change", after the relottery failure effect is announced to notify that the probability change promotion has failed as the redraw effect, the probability change is notified by the execution of the probability change promotion etc May be performed.

  In the re-lottery determination table, when the jackpot type is “15R certainty variation”, many determination values are allocated to the determination result to execute the re-lottery effect, compared to the determination result to not execute the re-lottery effect It may be set as Thereby, in the case of becoming a 15R certainty variation big hit, it is possible to increase the ratio of performing the definite variation notification in the re-lottery effect before the big hit gaming state is started. On the other hand, in the re-lottery determination table, when the jackpot type is “16R certainty variation”, many determination values do not execute the re-lottery effect, as compared to the determination result to execute the re-lottery effect It may be set to be assigned to the result. Thereby, when it becomes a 16R probability variation big hit, the percentage in which the probability variation notification is performed in the big hit gaming state or the probability variation promotion effect executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, etc. can do.

  In the re-lottery determination table, when the jackpot type is “15R definite variation”, many determination values are re-compared to the determination result to execute the re-lottery failure effect or the determination result to not execute the re-lottery effect It may be made to be assigned to the decision result that the lottery success effect is to be executed. Even in this case, in the case of the 15R certainty variation hit, it is possible to increase the rate at which the probable variation notification is performed by the re-lottery effect. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16R certainty variation", the determination result indicating that the relottery failure effect is to be executed, or the many decision values to be executed compared to the determination result to execute the relottery success effect. It may be made to be assigned to the decision result that the lottery effect is not executed. Even in this case, in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit, it is possible to increase the percentage of performing probability variation notification by probability variation promotion effect rather than the percentage of performing probability variation notification by re-lottery effect.

  When such a re-lottery determination table is set, when a definite change state occurs as compared with the case where the time change state occurs after the big hit gaming state ends, notification effect (re-lottery effect or positive change promotion effect) is performed for the positive change notification. The timing is likely to be delayed, and the notification effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed at a late timing, as long as it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the gaming value is higher than the time saving state after the big hit gaming state ends. In addition, when the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit gaming state is small (15R probability variation big hit) more than (16R probability variation big hit), when to do the notification effect (relottery production and probability variation promotion effect) for definite variation notification Is likely to be late, and by performing notification effect (probability change promotion effect) at a late timing, the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit gaming state can be increased and the expectation of becoming a big hit gaming state where the gaming value is high can be enhanced. Good.

  In the probability change promotion decision table, depending on whether the jackpot type is “15R non-probability change”, “15R probability change”, or “16R probability change”, each decision result so as to make the ratio for performing the probability change promotion effect different It is sufficient if the determined value is assigned to the user. When the jackpot type is “15R non-probability change”, as a probability change promotion effect, a probability change promotion failure effect for notifying that the probability change promotion has failed is executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is “15R definite variation” or “16R definite variation”, a probability change promotion success indication may be performed to notify that the probability change promotion has succeeded as the probability change promotion effect. Alternatively, even if the jackpot type is "15R definite change" or "16R definite change", a definite change promotion failure indication to notify that it has failed the definite change promotion is executed as a large hit in middle promotion effect, and then a definite change promotion as an ending promotion effect The positive change promotion success production which announces that it was successful may be performed.

  Note that the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect or the probability variation promotion effect may be determined separately or collectively. For example, a plurality of types of promotion effect patterns, which are patterns of combinations of re-lottery effects and probability change promotion effects, are prepared in advance. As the promotion effect pattern, for example, a pattern that executes re-lottery success effect and does not execute probability change promotion effect, a pattern that executes probability change promotion effect without executing re-lottery effect, and execution of re-lottery failure effect The pattern etc. which perform presentation should just be prepared beforehand. Further, for example, the ROM 121 stores a promotion effect pattern determination table in which numerical values (decision values) to be compared with random numbers for promotion effect pattern determination are assigned to each of the promotion effect patterns. In the promotion effect pattern determination table, it is set so that the assignment of the determination value to the promotion effect pattern is different depending on whether the big hit type is “15R non-probability change”, “15R probability change” or “16R probability change”. Good. Then, referring to the promotion effect pattern determination table on the basis of the numerical value data indicating the random value for promotion effect pattern determination extracted from the random counter of random number circuit 124 and effect control counter setting unit 193, a plurality of promotion effect patterns are selected. Decide on either. At this time, it is collectively determined whether or not the re-lottery effect and the probability variation promotion effect are respectively executed corresponding to the promotion effect pattern.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect or the probability change promotion effect is not limited to that performed on the side of the effect control board 12, but the effect control in which the determination result on the main board 11 side is transmitted from the main board 11 It may be notified by the command, and the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect or the probability change promotion effect may be specified based on the effect control command.

  After execution of the process of step S525, the combination of the finalized design which will be the final stop design constituting the big hit combination is determined (step S526). As an example, in the process of step S526, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, By referring to the stored predetermined big hit finalized symbol determination table, etc., the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are all arranged and stopped. The displayed symbol number determines the same decorative symbol.

  In the process of step S526, for example, when the jackpot type is "15R non-probability", one is a non-probable variation (for example, a decorative symbol indicating the numbers "2", "4", "6", "8") It is selected and set to the final stop symbol which constitutes a non-probability variation big hit combination. When the jackpot type is "15R definite variation" or "16R definite variation", either the non-deterministic symbol or the definite symbol may be selected according to, for example, the presence or absence of the probability variation promotion effect. More specifically, when a probability change promotion effect (including an ending promotion effect) is executed after the jackpot gaming state has been started, the non-probability symbol as in the case where the jackpot type is "15R non-probability change" One of them is selected and set to the final stop symbol that constitutes the non-probability big hit combination. On the other hand, for example, regardless of whether or not the re-lottery effect prior to the start of the big hit gaming state is executed, the probability change promotion effect (including the ending promotion effect) is executed after the big hit gaming state is started If not, one is selected from the odd variation symbols and set as the final stop symbol constituting the odd variation big hit combination. In addition, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the execution of the big hit notification effect (fanfare effect) that announces the start of the big hit gaming state after the final stop symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed One of the non-probable variation symbols may be selected and set as the final stop symbol that constitutes the non-probability variation jackpot combination.

  In addition, when the big hit classification is "15R definite variation" or "16R definite variation", the presence or absence of the probability variation promotion effect is determined according to which of the non probability variation symbol and the probability variation symbol is selected as the final stop symbol. You may That is, when the non-probability symbol is selected and set as the final stop symbol constituting the non-probability variation big hit combination, while it is decided to execute the probability variation promotion effect, the probability variation symbol is selected and the probability variation big hit combination is configured When the final stop symbol to be set is set, it may be decided not to execute the probability variation promotion effect. As described above, any determination may be made earlier as the determination of the final stop symbol and the determination as to whether or not to perform the probability variation promotion effect.

  After one of the processes in steps S523, S524, and S526 is performed, setting for effect presentation during variable display is performed (step S527), and setting for performing other effect control during variable display is performed. Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined to be any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S528). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared special pattern fluctuation control patterns and sets it as a usage pattern, corresponding to, for example, the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Further, for example, based on the setting by the variable display effect setting process in step S527, a plurality of effect control prepared to execute a part or all of the variable display effect, the advance notice effect, the big hit finalization effect, the operation effect, etc. One of the patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern.

  After execution of the process of step S528, for example, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command (step S529) . Then, setting is made to start the change of the decorative symbol or the like in the image display device 5 (step S530). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special pattern fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S 528 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like. It is only necessary to start the variation of the decorative design in the display design areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" provided in the display area of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S531), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display effect setting process executed in step S527 of FIG. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first performs setting of these variable display effects corresponding to the case of executing variable display effects such as "slip" and "simulated link". (Step SA01). For example, in the case where variable display effects of “pseudo series” or “slip” are executed according to a change pattern specified by a change pattern specification command transmitted from main substrate 11, a provisional display of these variable display effects is performed. It is sufficient to determine the decorative pattern etc. to be stopped and displayed.

  Subsequently to the process of step SA01, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (step SA02). At this time, if it is a fluctuation pattern involving super reach (step SA02; Yes), the operation effect determination table 144 is selected and set as a use table for determining the operation effect to any of a plurality of types (step SA03) ). At this time, the operation item buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like is read (step SA04). Further, numerical data indicating the random number SR5-1 for determining the operation effect is extracted from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 (SA05). Then, based on the random number value SR5-1 and the like extracted in step SA05, the operation effect is determined to be any of a plurality of types by referring to the operation effect determination table 144 selected as the use table (step SA06). At this time, it is determined whether the determination result in step SA06 is the operation effect A-1 or the operation effect A-2, or an operation effect other than these (step SA07).

  When the operation effect other than the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect A-2 at step SA07 (step SA07; No), the operation effect using at least one of the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the trigger button 31A It is decided to execute the blowing vibration rendition by the driving of the blowing fan 33 and the driving of the vibrating motor 34 in response to the execution of (step SA08). In the blowing vibration effect, an instruction operation to the stick controller 30 is performed by driving the blowing fan 33 and blowing air toward the stick controller 30, or by vibrating the vibration motor 34 to vibrate the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. It may be anything that can make the player recognize that it is valid. The instruction operation is effective by any rendering operation such as lighting a light emitting member such as an LED built in the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30, for example, not limited to air blowing by the air blowing fan 33 or vibration by the vibration motor 34. As long as the player can recognize that the

  When the process of step SA08 is executed, it is determined whether the determination result in step SA06 is the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2, or the operation effect B different from these (step SA09). Then, when the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2 (step SA09; Yes), the initial stage of the operation target operating in accordance with the instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 in the operation effect The operation target initial position determination table 145 is selected and set as a use table for determining the position (step SA10). Further, numerical data indicating the random value SR5-2 for determining the initial position for operation is extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the like (step SA11). Thereafter, the initial position of the operation target is determined by referring to the operation target initial position determination table 145 selected as the use table based on the random number value SR5-2 extracted in step SA11 (step SA12).

  When it is not a variation pattern with super reach at step SA02 (step SA02; No), or when it is operation effect A-1 or operation effect A-2 at step SA07 (step SA07; Yes), at step SA09 When it is the operation effect B other than the operation effect C-1 and the operation effect C-2 (step SA09; No), or after the process of step SA12 is executed, for example, the display result specification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 It is determined whether or not the special map display result is a "big hit" based on etc. (step SA13).

  When the special view display result in step SA13 is "big hit" (step SA13; Yes), it is used table for determining whether or not to execute the big hit finalization effect, and the type of the big hit final effect in the case of execution The big hit finalization effect determination table 146 is selected and set (step SA14). Further, numerical data indicating a random number SR6 for determining a big hit finalization determination is extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, etc. (step SA15). Then, based on the random number value SR6 extracted in step SA15, by referring to the big hit final effect determination table 146 selected as the use table, the determination of the big hit final effect including whether or not to execute the big hit final effect Perform (step SA16).

  If the special view display result is not "big hit" but "losing" in step SA13 (step SA13; No), or after the process of step SA16 is executed, whether or not to execute the notice effect is executed As the use table for determining the type of advance notice effect in the case, the notice effect determination table 147 is selected and set (step SA17). Further, numerical data indicating the random number value SR7 for determining the advance effect is determined from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, etc. (step SA18). At this time, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be specified, for example, in accordance with the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 or the like. Then, based on the random number value SR7 and the like extracted in step SA18, by referring to the notice effect determination table 147 selected as the use table, the notice effect including whether or not to execute the notice effect is determined. From (step SA19), the variable display effect setting process is ended.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of FIG. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S551). ). As an example, in the process of step S551, when the effect control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, etc. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S551 (step S551; Yes), the rendering operation control related to the display of the decorative symbol is performed based on, for example, the setting in the rendering control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. (Step S552). Subsequently, the preview presentation effect control process (step S553) and the big hit determination effect control process (step S554) are sequentially executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern in the current variable display involves super reach (step S555). At this time, if it is not a fluctuation pattern involving super reach (step S555; No), the variable display effect processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S555 that the variation pattern involves super reach (step S555; Yes), it is determined whether it is a predetermined operation effect period (step S556). The operation presentation period may be determined in advance by, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to a fluctuation pattern as a period for executing the operation presentation. When it is not the operation effect period in step S556 (step S556; No), the variable display effect process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S556 that the operation effect period is established (step S556: Yes), processing for effect operation control according to which operation effect is to be performed is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21 (A) and 21 (B), any of the operation effect A-1, the operation effect A-2, the operation effect B, the operation effect C-1, and the operation effect C-2. Can be selectively performed. It is determined in step SA06 of FIG. 40 which operation effect to execute.

  Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the operation effect A-1 (step S557). When the operation effect A-1 is executed (step S557; Yes), after the push button use reach effect process is executed (step S558), the variable display effect process is ended. If it is determined in step S557 that the operation effect A-1 is not to be executed (step S557; No), it is determined whether or not the operation effect A-2 is to be executed (step S559). In the case of executing the operation effect A-2 (step S559; Yes), after performing the continuous hitting reach effect process (step S560), the variable display effect process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S559 that the operation effect A-2 is not to be executed (step S559; No), it is determined whether or not the operation effect B is to be executed (step S561). In the case of executing the operation effect B (step S561; Yes), after performing the tilt reach effect process (step S562), the variable-displayed effect process is ended. If it is determined in step S561 that the operation effect B is not to be executed (step S561; No), it is determined whether or not the operation effect C-1 is to be executed (step S563). When the operation effect C-1 is to be executed (step S563; Yes), after the stick use reach effect process is executed (step S564), the variable display effect process is ended. If it is determined in step S563 that the operation effect C-1 is not to be executed (step S563; No), it is determined whether or not the operation effect C-2 is to be executed (step S565). In the case of executing the operation effect C-2 (step S565; Yes), after performing the stick-push combined reach effect process (step S566), the variable-displayed effect process is ended. If it is determined in step S565 that the operation effect C-2 is not to be executed (step S565; No), the variable display effect process is ended. When it is determined in step S565 that the operation effect C-2 is not to be performed, a predetermined error process is performed because, for example, the operation effect to be performed can not be specified, and for example, notification of abnormality occurrence Or the like may be performed.

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the notice effect control process executed in step S553 of FIG. In the preview production control process shown in FIG. 42, CPU 120 for production control first determines whether or not it is a predetermined preview production period based on, for example, settings in a production control pattern corresponding to the preview production (step SB01). ). The advance notice effect period may be determined in advance by, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the notice effect, as a period for executing the notice effect. When it is not the advance notice effect period in step SB01 (step SB01; No), the notice effect control processing ends.

  If it is determined in step SB01 that there is a notice effect period (step SB01; Yes), it is determined whether it is a predetermined operation detection period (step SB02). The operation detection period here corresponds to, for example, a notice effect as a period for detecting an instruction operation (press operation) by the player on the push button 31B or an instruction operation (push operation) on the trigger button 35A of the stick controller 30. It may be determined in advance by the effect control pattern or the like.

  When it is the operation detection period in step SB02 (step SB02; Yes), for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern, etc., effect operation control for executing the operation promotion effect is performed (step SB03). Thereafter, based on an operation detection signal or the like transmitted from the push sensor 35B, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B has been detected (step SB04). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B (step SB04; No), an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined whether there has been a detection (step SB05). When there is no detection of an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A (step SB05; No), for example, after performing the rendering operation control during the operation detection period based on the setting in the rendering control pattern (step SB06), the preview rendering control process Finish.

  If it is determined in step SB04 that there is detection of an instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B (step SB04; Yes), for example, the push operation history buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is incremented by one. The push operation history value is updated so as to be incremented by one or the like (step SB07). When it is determined in step SB05 that the instruction operation (push operation) to the trigger button 31A is detected (step SB05; Yes), for example, the trigger operation history buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is incremented by one. Thus, the trigger operation history value is updated so as to add 1 (step SB08).

  After performing any of the processes of steps SB07 and SB08, setting for starting the rendering operation at the time of operation detection is performed (step SB09). As an example, in the process of step SB09, display control is performed on various commands created according to presentation control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, etc.) read out from the presentation control pattern corresponding to the preview presentation. By performing transmission to the unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14 or the like, a rendering operation for notifying a message as notification content at the time of operation in the preliminary rendering may be performed. At this time, after the operation detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like is ended (step SB10), the advance effect control process may be ended.

  When it is not the operation detection period in step SB02 (step SB02; No), for example, after performing the rendering operation control after the end of the detection period based on the setting in the rendering control pattern, etc. (step SB11), the advance effect control End the process.

  FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot determination effect control process executed in step S554 of FIG. In the big hit determination effect control process shown in FIG. 43, the CPU for effect control 120 executes various processes for performing a production operation control according to which big hit determination effect is to be performed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 (A) and 22 (B), any of the big hit determination effect SP1 to the big hit determination effect SP4 can be selectively executed. It is determined in step SA16 of FIG. 40 which of the jackpot determination effects are to be executed.

  In the big hit determination effect control process shown in FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination effect SP1 is to be executed (step SB21). If the big hit finalization effect SP1 is to be executed (step SB21; Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start symbol variation in which variable display of a decorative symbol or the like is started (step SB22). When it is not at the symbol variation start time in step SB22 (step SB22; No), the big hit determination effect control processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step SB21 that the big hit decision effect SP1 is not to be executed (step SB21; No), it is determined whether the big hit decision effect SP2 is to be executed (step SB23). When the big hit finalization effect SP2 is executed (step SB23; Yes), it is determined whether or not reach is established when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state (step SB24). When reach is not established at step SB24 (step SB24; No), the jackpot determination effect control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step SB23 that the big hit decision effect SP2 is not to be executed (step SB23; No), it is determined whether the big hit decision effect SP3 is to be executed (step SB25). In the case of executing the jackpot determination effect SP3 (step SB25; Yes), the first operation detection in which the first instruction operation on the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30, the trigger button 31A, or the push button 31B in the operation effect etc. It is determined whether it is time (step SB26). When it is not the time of first operation detection at step SB26 (step SB26; No), the big hit finalization effect control process is ended.

  If it is determined in step SB25 that the big hit decision effect SP3 is not to be executed (step SB25; No), it is determined whether the big hit decision effect SP4 is to be executed (step SB27). When the big hit finalization effect SP4 is executed (step SB27; Yes), at the time of the achievement effect execution where the achievement effect of notifying that the variable display result will be the "big hit" is executed based on the operation detection in the operation effect etc. It is determined whether there is any (step SB28). If it is determined in step SB27 that the big hit decision effect SP4 is not executed (step SB27; No), or if the achievement effect is not executed in step SB28 (step SB28; No), the big hit decision effect control processing finish.

  When it is time to start symbol variation at step SB22 (step SB22; Yes), or when reach is established at step SB24 (step SB24; Yes), when it is time to detect an initial operation at step SB26 (step SB26) Yes) or when it is at the time of achievement effect execution in step SB28 (step SB28; Yes), after performing the effect operation control for executing the big hit finalization effect based on the setting etc. in the effect control pattern, for example (Step SB29), the big hit fixed effect control processing ends.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the push button use reach effect process executed in step S558 in FIG. 41 corresponding to the case where the operation effect A-1 is executed. In the push button use reach effect process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is an operation explanation period based on, for example, a setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the operation effect A-1. It is determined (step SC01). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step SC01; Yes), after the control of the rendering operation to be the operation explanation effect is performed (step SC02), the push button use reach effect process is ended. As an example, in the process of step SC02, the display control instruction specified by the display control data read from the effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like to display the effect image in the operation explanation effect Control of the rendering operation in the operation explanation rendering, such as displaying in the display area of the device 5, may be performed.

  When it is not the operation explanation period in step SC01 (step SC01; No), it is determined whether it is the pressing detection period or not based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like (step SC03). The pressing detection period here may be a period in which a single instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B is effectively detected as a shooting operation. In this pressing detection period, not only one instruction operation (pushing operation) on the push button 31B but also one instruction operation (pushing and pulling operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 are effective as an injection operation. As long as it can be detected.

  If it is determined in step SC03 that the pressing detection period is set (step SC03; Yes), it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) on push button 35B has been detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from push sensor 35B. To do (step SC04). At this time, if there is no detection of an instruction operation (press operation) on the push button 35B (step SC04; No), an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined whether or not there has been a detection of (1) (step SC05).

  If there is no detection of an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A at step SC05 (step SC05; No), for example, after performing the rendering operation control during the pressing detection period based on the setting in the rendering control pattern, etc. (Step SC06) The push button use reach presentation process is ended. Here, in the process of step SC06, the blowing vibration control for performing the blowing vibration effect is not performed. That is, when the operation effect A-1 using the push button 31B is executed, the instruction operation is effectively detected even in the pressing detection period in which the instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B is effectively detected. The blowing vibration effect for causing the player to recognize that is not performed.

  When it is determined in step SC04 that there is detection of an instruction operation (push operation) on push button 31B (step SC04; Yes), for example, the push operation history buffer value stored in effect control buffer setting unit 194 is incremented by one. The push operation history value is updated so as to be incremented by one (step SSC07). When it is determined in step SC05 that the instruction operation (push operation) to the trigger button 31A is detected (step SC05; YEs), for example, the trigger operation history buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is incremented by one. Thus, the trigger operation history value is updated so as to add 1 (step SC08).

  After one of the processes of steps SC07 and SC08 is executed, it is determined whether or not there is a hit based on, for example, settings in the effect control pattern (step SC09). As an example, when the variable display result is "losing", it is always determined that there is no hit, while when the variable display result is "big hit", it is always determined that there is a hit. Selection and setting of the effect control pattern may be performed. Then, it is determined in step SC09 whether or not there is a hit (step SC10).

  When it is determined in step SC10 that there is a hit (step SC10; Yes), an effect for executing an effect effect to notify that the variable display result is "big hit", etc. based on the setting in the effect control pattern, etc. Operation control is performed (step SC11). On the other hand, when it is determined in step SC10 that there is no hit (step SC10; No), the non-delivery effect is not notified that the variable display result is "big hit" based on the setting in the effect control pattern, etc. Effect operation control for executing (step SC12).

  After executing any of the processes of steps SC11 and SC12, after the pressing detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like is ended (step SC13), the push button use reach effecting process is ended.

  When it is not the pressing detection period in step SC03 (step SC03; No), for example, after performing the rendering operation control after the end of the detection period based on the setting in the rendering control pattern, etc. (step SC14), using the push button End the reach production process.

  FIG. 45 shows an example of effect display and the like in the operation effect A-1. In this effect display example, first, as shown in, for example, FIG. 45 (A), the same decorative symbols are aligned in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C of "left" and "right" and stop display (temporary stop display) As a result, the variable display state becomes the reach state. Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the ornamental symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left portion of the display area or the like, and then a message corresponding to the start of operation effect A-1 such as "roulette chance!" An effect image to be notified is displayed. The effect image may be displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 by the effect operation control by the process of step SC02 shown in FIG. 44, for example.

  After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 45 (B), in the process of step SC02, for example, by displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. 45 (C) or the like, one instruction operation on the push button 31B. A rendering operation that urges a single-shot operation that is a (pressing operation) may be performed as the operation description rendering. Then, for example, along with the display of the effect image as shown in FIG. 45 (D), it becomes a pressing detection period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B (step SC03 in FIG. 44; Yes) . In the pressing detection period, not only the instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B, but also the instruction operation (pushing and pulling operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is effectively detected.

  When the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B in the pressing detection period corresponding to the operation effect A-1, it is determined that there is an operation on the push button 31B in step SC04 of FIG. Thus, the push operation history value is incremented by one in step SC07. On the other hand, when the player performs an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A in the depression operation period, it is determined that the operation on the trigger button 31A is present in step SC05 of FIG. The trigger operation history value is incremented by 1 at SC08. At this time, if it is determined that there is a hit in steps SC09 and SC10 of FIG. 44, then in the process of step SC11, for example, an effect image is displayed as shown in FIG. It is only necessary to control the execution of the rendering operation.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous hitting reach effect process executed in step 560 of FIG. 41 corresponding to the case where the operation effect A-2 is executed. In the continuous hitting reach production process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 120 for production control first determines whether or not it is an operation explanation period based on, for example, a setting in the production control pattern selected corresponding to the operation production A-2. It determines (step SD01). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step SD01; Yes), after the control of the rendering operation to be the operation explanation effect is performed (step SD02), the continuous hitting reach effect process is ended.

  When it is not the operation explanation period in step SD01 (step SD01; No), it is determined whether or not it is the pressing detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like (step SD03). The pressing detection period here may be a period in which a plurality of instruction operations (pressing operations) on the push button 31B are effectively detected as the continuous fire operation. In this pressing detection period, not only a plurality of instruction operations (pushing operations) on the push button 31B but also a plurality of instruction operations (pushing and pulling operations) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 are effective as continuous shooting operations. It should just be able to detect.

  If it is determined in step SD03 that the pressing detection period has come (step SD03; Yes), it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) on push button 35B has been detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from push sensor 35B. To do (step SD04). At this time, if there is no detection of an instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 35B (step SD04; No), an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined whether or not there has been a detection of (step SD05).

  When it is determined in step SD04 that there is detection of an instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B (step SD04; Yes), for example, the push operation flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 etc. (Step SD06). When the push operation flag is already on, the process of step SD06 may be skipped. If the trigger operation flag is on when the process of step SD06 is executed, the trigger operation flag may be cleared to be in the off state.

  When it is determined in step SD05 that the instruction operation (push operation) to the trigger button 31A is detected (step SD05; Yes), for example, the trigger operation flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to the on state To do (step SD07). When the trigger operation flag is already on, the process of step SD07 may be skipped. If the push operation flag is on when the process of step SD07 is executed, the push operation flag may be cleared to be in the off state.

  After one of the processes of steps SD06 and SD07 is performed, it is determined whether or not there is a hit based on, for example, settings in the effect control pattern (step SD08). As an example, when the variable display result is "loss", it may be determined that there is no hit at all times. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", if the number of times it is determined that there is an operation in the process of step SD04 or step SD05 is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) When the number of times it is determined that the operation has been made reaches a predetermined number, it may be determined that there is a hit. Then, it is determined in step SD08 whether or not there is a hit (step SD09).

  When it is determined in step SD09 that there is a hit (step SD09; Yes), an effect for executing an effect effect notifying that the variable display result will be a "big hit", etc. based on the setting in the effect control pattern, etc. Operation control is performed (step SD10).

  For example, when there is no detection of an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A in step SD05 (step SD05; No), or when it is determined that there is no hit in step SD09 (step SD09; No) It is determined whether or not the non-delivery effect timing which is the timing for starting the execution of the non-delivery effect is reached based on the setting etc. in (step SD11).

  When it is at non-delivery effect timing in step SD11 (step SD11; Yes), non-delivery effect for not notifying that the variable display result will be "big hit" etc. is performed based on the setting etc. in the effect control pattern The rendering operation control is performed (step SD12).

  After executing any of the processes of steps SD10 and SD12, the depression detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like is ended (step SD13). At this time, it is determined whether the push operation flag is on (step SD14). When the push operation flag is on (step SD14; Yes), after the push operation flag is cleared and turned off (step SD15), the push operation history value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step SD16) , End the continuous hitting reach production process.

  When the push operation flag is off in step SD14 (step SD14; No), it is determined whether the trigger operation flag is on (step SD17). At this time, if the trigger operation flag is off (step SD17; No), the continuous hit reach effect processing is ended. On the other hand, when the trigger operation flag is on (step SD17; Yes), after the trigger operation flag is cleared and turned off (step SD18), the trigger operation history value is updated so as to be incremented by one. From (step SD19), the continuous hit reach production process ends.

  When it is not the non-delivery effect timing in step SD11 (step SD11; No), after performing the rendering operation control during the pressing detection period based on the setting in the rendering control pattern, etc. (step SD20), the continuous hitting reach rendering process Finish. Here, in the process of step SD20, the blowing vibration control for performing the blowing vibration effect is not performed. That is, when the operation effect A-2 using the push button 31B is executed, the instruction operation is effectively detected even in the pressing detection period in which the instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B is effectively detected. The blowing vibration effect for causing the player to recognize that is not performed.

  As an example, in the process of step SD20, when it is determined that there is no hit in step SD09, display of the effect image corresponding to no hit based on that it is determined that there is an operation in the process of step SD04 or step SD05. For example, a rendering operation control corresponding to no hit may be performed such as (for example, display of a rendering image in which a bow and arrow shot by a character is off target).

  When it is not the pressing detection period in step SD03 (step SD03; No), after performing the rendering operation control after the detection period is completed based on the setting in the rendering control pattern, etc. (step SD21), the continuous hitting reach effect End the process.

  FIG. 47 shows an example of effect display in the operation effect A-2. In this effect display example, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), after the variable display state is in the reach state, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), the decorative symbol is reduced and the upper left of the display area After being displayed on a section or the like, an effect image for displaying a message corresponding to the start of the operation effect A-2 such as “roulette chance!” Is displayed. The effect image may be displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 by the effect operation control by the process of step SD02 shown in FIG. 46, for example.

  After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 47 (B), in the process of step SD02, for example, by displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. 47 (C), etc., a plurality of instruction operations on the push button 31B The rendering operation for prompting the continuous fire operation, which is (pressing operation), may be executed as the operation explanation rendering. After that, it becomes a pressing detection period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B (step SD03 in FIG. 46; Yes). In the pressing detection period, not only the instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B, but also the instruction operation (pushing and pulling operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is effectively detected.

  When the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B in the pressing operation period corresponding to the operation effect A-2, it is determined that there is an operation on the push button 31B in step SD04 of FIG. Thus, in step SD06, the push operation flag is set to the on state. On the other hand, when the player performs an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A in the depression detection period, it is determined that the operation on the trigger button 31A is present in step SD05 of FIG. The trigger operation flag is set to ON at SD07. At this time, whenever it is determined that there is no hit in steps SD08 and SD09 every time it is determined that there is an operation in step SD04 or step SD05, the process proceeds to step SD20 until the non-delivery effect timing is reached in step SD11. The processing may be executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (D), an effect image may be displayed such that the bow and arrow released by the character deviates from the target. If it is determined that there is a hit in steps SD08 and SD09 in FIG. 46, then in the process of step SD10, an effect is achieved, for example, by displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. 47 (E). It is only necessary to control the execution of the rendering operation.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the tilt reach effect process executed in step S562 of FIG. 41 corresponding to the case where the operation effect B is executed. In the tilt reach effect process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the operation explanation period based on, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the operation effect B, etc. (Step SC21). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step SC21; Yes), control of the rendering operation to be the operation explanation effect is performed (step SC22).

  Subsequently to the process of step SC22, it is determined whether or not the operation explanation period has elapsed based on, for example, settings in the effect control pattern (step SC23). When the operation explanation period has not elapsed (step SC23; No), the tilt reach effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the operation explanation period has elapsed (step SC23; Yes), an initial value in the effect update determination value is set based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like (step SC24). The effect update determination value determines whether or not the number of instruction operations (tilting operations) on the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 has reached a predetermined number of times, and when the predetermined number of times has been reached Is used in the process of step SC32 described later as a determination value for changing. After the processing of step SC24 is performed, after setting the tilting operation count initial value (step SC25), the tilting reach effect processing is ended. As an example, in the process of step SC25, if the tilt operation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like is cleared, the tilt operation count value, which is the stored value, is set to the initial value "0". Good.

  When it is not the operation explanation period in step SC21 (step SC21; No), it is determined whether or not it is the tilt detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like (step SC26). The tilt detection period here may be a period in which a plurality of instruction operations (tilt operations) to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 are effectively detected.

  When it is in the tilt detection period in step SC26 (step SC26; Yes), based on the operation detection signal and the like transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32, detection of an instruction operation (tilt operation in any direction) to the operating rod 30A. It is determined whether or not there has been (step SC27). At this time, if there is a detection of an instruction operation (tilt operation) to the operating rod 30A (step SC27; Yes), the stored operation by reading stored information of the tilt direction buffer of the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example The direction is read out (step SC28). In the tilt direction buffer, information indicating the detected direction of the tilt operation on the operating rod 30A may be stored in the process of step SC30 described later.

  Subsequent to the process of step SC28, it is determined whether or not a tilting operation in the same direction is detected by comparing the tilting direction detected in step SC27 with the tilting direction read out in step SC28, etc. Step SC29). At this time, if the direction of the detected tilting operation is different (step SC29; No), the direction of the tilting operation detected at step SC27 is stored (step SC30). As an example, in the process of step SC30, the direction of the tilting operation only needs to be stored by writing in the tilting direction buffer information that can specify the detected direction of the tilting operation. Further, for example, the tilt operation count value, which is the storage value of the tilt operation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like, is updated so as to add 1 (step SC31).

  Following the process of step SC31, it is determined whether the tilting operation count value has reached the effect update determination value (step SC32). If the tilt operation count value has not reached the effect update determination value (step SC32; No), the tilt reach effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the tilt operation count value reaches the effect update determination value (step SC32; Yes), effect operation control for updating the effect operation during the tilt detection period is performed (step SC33). As an example, in the process of step SC33, in the effect image indicating the power bar displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the display of the scale may be updated so as to indicate an increase in power.

  After executing the process of step SC33, after setting a new effect update determination value (step SC34), the tilt reach effect process is ended. The effect update determination value set in step SC34 determines whether the variable display result is "loss" or "big hit" based on the setting in the effect control pattern, or the effect after the update by the process of step SC33. It may be set to different values according to the mode (content of effect), the timing at which the effect operation is updated by the process of step SC33, or part or all of them. As an example, when the variable display result is "losing", updating of the rendering operation becomes difficult by setting a larger value as the effect update determination value than when the variable display result is "big hit" It should just be set.

  When it is determined in step SC27 that there is no detection of the tilting operation (step SC27; No), or when it is determined in step SC29 that the directions of the tilting operation are the same (step SC29; Yes), the tilt detection period After performing the inside rendering operation control (step SC35), the tilting reach presentation process is ended.

  In the process of step SC33 or step SC35, the blowing vibration control for performing the blowing vibration effect is performed. That is, when the operation effect B using the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is performed, when the instruction operation (the tilting operation) on the operating rod 30A is in a tilt detection period in which the instruction operation is effectively detected, The blowing vibration effect that makes the player recognizable only is executed.

  If it is determined in step S26 that the tilt detection period is not reached (step SC26; No), it is determined whether the tilt operation count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined achievement determination value (step SC36). The achievement determination value may be set to a different value depending on whether the variable display result is "lost" or "big hit" based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like. As an example, when the variable display result is "losing", it may be determined always less than the achievement determination value. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", for example, the achievement determination value may be set to "10" so that the tilting operation count value easily becomes equal to or more than the achievement determination value.

  When it is determined in step SC36 that the tilting operation count value is equal to or greater than the achievement determination value (step SC36; Yes), an achievement effect notifying that the variable display result will be a "big hit", etc. based on settings etc. in the effect control pattern After effect operation control for execution is performed (step SC37), the tilt reach effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the tilting operation count value is less than the achievement determination value (step SC36; No), the non-delivery notice that the variable display result is "big hit" etc. is not made based on the setting etc. After performing the rendering operation control for executing the rendering (step SC38), the tilt reach rendering process is ended.

  FIG. 49 shows an example of effect display in the operation effect B and the like. In this effect display example, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), following the fact that the variable display state is in the reach state, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (B) After displaying on the upper left portion of the screen or the like, an effect image for displaying a message corresponding to the start of the operation effect B such as “Tuning opportunity!” Is displayed. The effect image may be displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 by the effect operation control by the process of step SC22 shown in FIG. 48, for example.

  After the effect image shown in FIG. 49 (B) is displayed, the instruction to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is continuously displayed by displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. A rendering operation that urges an operation (tilt operation) may be performed as the operation description rendering. Then, it becomes a tilt detection period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operating rod 30A (step SC26 in FIG. 48; Yes).

  When the player performs an instruction operation (tilt operation) to the operating rod 30A in the tilt detection period corresponding to the operation effect B, it is determined that the operation to the operating rod 30A is present in step SC27 of FIG. When it is determined in step SC29 that the direction of the tilting operation is different, the tilting operation count value is incremented by 1 in step SC31. At this time, whenever it is determined in step SC32 that the tilting operation count value has reached the effect update determination value, the effect mode (content of effect) is updated in step SC33, as shown in FIG. 49D, for example. An effect image may be displayed such that two characters perform a tug of war. If it is determined in step SC26 that the tilt detection period is not in progress, and if the tilt operation count value is equal to or greater than the achievement determination value in step SC36, then the process shown in FIG. The execution of the rendering operation as the achievement effect may be controlled by the display of such a rendering image.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the stick use reach effect process executed in step S564 of FIG. 41 corresponding to the case where the operation effect C-1 is executed. In the stick use reach effect processing shown in FIG. 50, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is an operation explanation period based on settings in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the operation effect C-1, for example Is determined (step SC51). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step SC51; Yes), control of the rendering operation to be the operation explanation effect is performed (step SC52).

  Subsequently to the process of step SC52, it is determined whether or not the operation explanation period has elapsed based on, for example, settings in the effect control pattern (step SC53). When the operation explanation period has not elapsed (step SC53; No), the stick use reach effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the operation explanation period has elapsed (step SC53; Yes), after setting for displaying the operation target at the initial position (step SC54), the stick use reach effect processing is ended. In the process of step SC54, for example, setting of display coordinates or the like is performed in order to display a predetermined effect image to be operated at the operation target initial position determined by the process of step SA12 shown in FIG.

  When it is not the operation explanation period in step SC51 (step SC51; No), it is determined whether or not it is the tilt detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like (step SC55). Then, if it is in a tilt detection period (step SC55; Yes), is there a detection of an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32? It is determined whether or not it is (step SC56). At this time, if there is a detection of an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operating rod 30A (step SC56; Yes), a production operation update control for changing the production mode (play content) according to the detected direction of the tilt operation (Step SC57). As an example, in the process of step SC57, a predetermined effect image (for example, an effect image indicating an aim, etc.) to be operated is moved in the display area of the image display device 5 in accordance with the direction of tilting operation on the operating rod 30A. The effect image including the background image may be scrolled or displayed.

  If it is determined in step SC56 that there is no detection of a tilting operation (step SC56; No) or after the process of step SC57 has been performed, is it a push detection period based on settings in the effect control pattern or the like? It is determined whether or not it is (step SC58). The squeeze detection period is a period in which a player's instruction operation (push and squeeze operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 is effectively detected.

  The squeeze detection period may be started after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the tilting operation period is started based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like. FIG. 51 shows a setting example of the operation explanation period, the tilt detection period, and the push detection period. In this embodiment, when the operation effect C-1 is started, the operation explanation period starts first. At this time, the instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A are both invalid (detection inhibition). Then, when reaching the timing T1 at which the operation explanation period ends, the tilt detection period starts, and as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operating rod 30A can be effectively detected. become able to. That is, the timing T1 is the end timing of the operation explanation period and the start timing of the tilting operation period. Even when the start timing T1 of such a tilting operation period is reached, the push detection period is not yet started, and the instruction operation (push operation) on the trigger button 31A is invalid (detection prohibition). Thereafter, when a predetermined time set in the effect control pattern or the like elapses and timing T2 is reached, a push detection period is started, and as shown in FIG. 51 (B), an instruction operation (push operation) on trigger button 31A ) Can also be effectively detected. That is, the timing T2 that comes after the start timing T1 of the tilting operation period is the start timing of the push detection period.

  When it is not the pushing detection period in step SC58 (step SC58; No), after performing the rendering operation control before the pushing detection period (step SC59), the stick use reach effect processing is finished. On the other hand, when it is in the push detection period (step SC58; Yes), whether or not the instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A has been detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined (step SC60). At this time, if there is no detection of an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A (step SC60; No), after performing rendering operation control during a push and pull detection period (step SC61), stick use reach production processing finish.

  In the processes of step SC57, step SC59, and step SC61, the blowing vibration control for performing the blowing vibration effect is performed. That is, when the operation effect C-1 using the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the trigger button 31A is executed, a tilt detection period in which an instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operating rod 30A is effectively detected is started. After that, a blowing vibration effect that makes the player recognizable only when performing an instruction operation on the operating rod 30A or the trigger button 31A is executed.

  When the instruction operation (push and pull operation) to the trigger button 31A is detected in step SC60 (step SC60; Yes), the presence or absence of a hit is determined based on, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern (step SC62). As an example, when the variable display result is "loss", it may be determined that there is no hit at all times. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", it may be determined that there is a hit at all times. Alternatively, even when the variable display result is a "big hit", the determination of no hit may be made. Then, in step SC62, it is determined whether or not there is a hit (step SC63).

  When it is determined in step SC63 that there is a hit (step SC63; Yes), an effect for executing an effect effect notifying that the variable display result will be "big hit", etc. based on the setting in the effect control pattern, etc. Operation control is performed (step SC64). On the other hand, when it is determined in step SC63 that there is no hit (step SC63; No), the non-delivery effect is not notified that the variable display result is "big hit" based on the setting in the effect control pattern, etc. Effect operation control for executing (step SC65).

  After executing any of the processes of steps SC64 and SC65, the stick use reach effect process is ended after the tilt detection period and the push detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like are ended (step SC66).

  When it is not the tilt detection period in step SC55 (step SC55; No), after performing the rendering operation control outside the detection period based on the setting in the rendering control pattern, etc. (step SC67), the stick use reach presentation End the process.

  FIG. 52 shows an example of effect display and the like in the operation effect C-1. In this effect display example, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), following the fact that the variable display state is in the reach state, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), the decorative symbol is reduced and the lower left of the display area Display on a department or the like. At this time, the effect image is displayed in accordance with the effect control pattern or the like in the process of step SC52 shown in FIG. 50, whereby an instruction operation (tilting operation) to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or 1 for the trigger button 31A is performed. A rendering operation for prompting a single-shot operation, which is an instruction operation of a turn (push and pull operation), may be performed as the operation description rendering. When the operation explanation period ends, in the process of step SC54 shown in FIG. 50, as a predetermined effect image to be operated, for example, an effect image showing an aim as shown in FIG. 52 (C), an operation effect C-1 Display at the initial position determined in response to the execution of. Then, first, in a tilt detection period (step SC55 in FIG. 50; Yes), an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operating rod 30A is validated.

  When the player performs an instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operating rod 30A in the tilt detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-1, it is determined that there is a tilting operation on the operating rod 30A in step SC56 of FIG. Thus, control is performed to update the rendering operation in accordance with the operation direction of the operating rod 30A in step SC57. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 52D, the display position of the effect image representing the aim can be moved in accordance with the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 52E, when the display position of the effect image representing the aim matches the display position of the effect image representing the enemy aircraft, the display mode of the effect image representing the aim captures the enemy aircraft A specific display mode corresponding to the above (for example, a display mode in which the display color of the aim is red and the brightness is enhanced) may be obtained.

  After the tilt detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-1 is started, the push detection period starts after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses (step S58 in FIG. 50; Yes), and the trigger button of the stick controller 30 The instruction operation (push and pull operation) for 31A is validated. When the player performs an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A in the push and pull detection period, for example, as shown in FIG. 52F, an effect image in which a shell is fired is displayed. Further, if it is determined in step S60 of FIG. 50 that there is an operation on the trigger button 31A, for example, if it is determined that there is a hit in steps SC61 and SC62, for example, the process of step SC64 It is only necessary to control the execution of the rendering operation to be the achieved rendering by the display of the rendering image that has succeeded in shooting down the enemy aircraft as shown in 52 (G).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the stick-push combined reach presentation process executed in step S566 of FIG. 41 corresponding to the case where the operation effect C-2 is executed. In the stick-push combined reach effect processing shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 first performs the stick use reach effect processing similar to the case where the operation effect C-1 is executed (step SC81). In addition, even if the stick use reach presentation processing similar to the case where the operation presentation C-1 is executed is performed, the effect mode (statement content) in the operation presentation C-2 is set to the operation presentation effect by the setting in the presentation control pattern or the like. It may be different from the effect mode (content of effect) in C-1.

  After executing the stick use reach presentation process in step SC81, it is determined whether or not it is a pressing detection period based on settings in the presentation control pattern (step SC82). The pressing detection period here may be started after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the pushing detection period is started based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like. FIG. 54 shows a setting example of the operation explanation period, the tilt detection period, the push detection period, and the press detection period. In the setting example shown in FIG. 54, similarly to the setting example shown in FIG. 51, until the start timing T2 of the push detection period is reached, the predetermined period after the start of the tilting operation period following the end of the operation explanation period After a lapse of time, the push detection period starts. On the other hand, even when the start timing T2 of the push detection period is reached, the push detection period is not yet started, and the instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B is invalid (detection prohibition). After that, when a predetermined time set in the effect control pattern or the like elapses and timing T3 is reached, the pressing detection period is started, and as shown in FIG. It becomes possible to detect effectively. That is, the timing T3 that comes after the start timing T2 of the push detection period is the start timing of the depression detection period.

  Note that the start timing T2 of the push detection period and the start timing T3 of the push detection period may be set to the same timing so that the push detection period is also started simultaneously with the start of the push detection period. Alternatively, when there is no instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30 in the tilt detection period, or when there is no instruction operation (push operation) on the trigger button 31A in the push detection period, The detection period may not be started. That is, in the pressing detection period, there is an instruction operation (tilting operation) to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 in the tilting detection period, or an instruction operation (pushing operation) on the trigger button 31A in the pushing detection period. It may be started on condition that one or both of the things that have been done. Thereby, when the operation effect C-2 is executed, the operation is performed when there is no instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, or when there is no instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A. The rendering operation specific to the rendering C-2 may not be performed, and only the rendering operation common to the pre-reading rendering of the operation rendering C-1 may be performed.

  After the pressing detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-2 is started, when an instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B is detected, as shown by a broken line in FIG. When finished, the tilt detection period or the push detection period may be continued. After the presentation operation control (step SC64 in FIG. 50) for executing the achievement presentation is performed in the stick use reach presentation process of step SC81, control is performed so as not to be the pressing detection period, and the variable display result is You may make it not alert | report that becoming a "big hit" redundantly.

  When it is not a pressing detection period in step SC82 (step SC82; No), the stick-push combined reach presentation process is ended. On the other hand, when it is in the pressing detection period (step SC82; Yes), the rendering operation control for executing the push promotion effect is performed (step SC83). The push promotion effect only needs to include an effect operation that urges an operation act on the push button 31B, for example, in the same effect mode (action content) as the operation promotion effect in the case of executing "at the time of operation advance". Thereafter, based on an operation detection signal or the like transmitted from the push sensor 35B, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B has been detected (step SC84). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B (step SC84; No), the stick-push combined pre-reading effect process is ended.

  When an instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B is detected in step SC84 (step SC84; Yes), a predetermined effect image (for example, an effect image indicating an aim, etc.) to be operated is enlarged. Control is performed to update the rendering operation (step SC85). At this time, after the pressing detection period ends (step SC86), the stick-push combined reach effect processing ends.

  FIG. 55 shows an example of effect display and the like in the operation effect C-2. In this effect display example, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), following the fact that the variable display state is in the reach state, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (B) Display on a department or the like. At this time, an instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or a single instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A is performed by displaying an effect image according to the effect control pattern. A rendering operation for prompting a single-shot operation may be performed as the operation explanation rendering. After that, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55C and 55D, effect images similar to those in FIGS. 52C and 52D corresponding to the operation effect C-1 may be displayed.

  Thereafter, a pressing detection period starts (step S82 in FIG. 53; Yes), and an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B is validated. At this time, in the process of step SC83, effect operation control for executing push promotion effect is performed, for example, by displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. 55 (E). When the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B in this pressing detection period, in the process of step SC85 of FIG. 53, for example, from the effect image shown in FIG. 55 (F), FIG. Furthermore, control to change to the effect image shown in FIG. 55 (H) is performed, and the effect image representing the aim is enlarged and displayed.

  Then, when the player performs an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A in a push and pull detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-2, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (I), a shell is fired. Display the effect image. Further, for example, if it is determined that there is a hit in the stick use reach effect process executed in step SC81 of FIG. 53, for example, a effect image which succeeds in shooting down the enemy aircraft as shown in FIG. 55 (J). The execution of the rendering operation to be the achieved rendering may be controlled by the display of or the like.

  FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display stop process executed in step S173 of FIG. In the variable display stop process shown in FIG. 56, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol determination display flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is on (step S571). Here, the symbol determination display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S575 described later based on the reception of the symbol determination designating command transmitted from the main substrate 11 or the like.

  When the symbol determination display flag is off in step S571 (step S571; No), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination designating command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S572). At this time, if the symbol determination designating command is not received (step S572: No), the variable display stop process is ended, and the process waits until the symbol determination designating command is received. When a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol determination designation command, it may be determined that an error has occurred in transmission and reception of the command, and predetermined error processing may be performed.

  If the symbol determination designating command is received in step S572 (step S572; Yes), for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc., variable display of decorative symbols is performed. The final stop symbol as the finalized decorative symbol to be the result is derived and displayed (step S573). In addition, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) predetermined as the symbol determination display time is set (step S574). Then, after the symbol determination display flag is set to the on state (step S575), the variable display stop process is ended. Thus, after the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the process of step S573, variable display is stopped in the effect control process according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt until the symbol finalizing display time set in step S574 has elapsed. Every time the process is executed, it is determined in step S571 that the symbol determination display flag is on.

  When the symbol determination display flag is on at step S571 (step S571; Yes), it is determined whether the symbol determination display time has elapsed (step S576). At this time, if the symbol determination display time has not elapsed (step S576; No), the variable display stop process is ended, and the process waits until the symbol determination display time elapses.

  If it is determined in step S576 that the symbol determination display time has elapsed (step S576; Yes), the symbol determination display flag is cleared to be in an off state (step S577). At this time, the operation item change setting process is executed, and the operation item is set to be changeable based on the operation history of the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B (step S578). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" (step S579). Then, when the variable display result is not a "big hit" but a "loss" (step S579; No), the effect process flag is cleared to initialize its value to "0" (step S580), and the variable is variable. End display stop processing.

  When it is determined in step S579 that the variable display result is "big hit" (step S579; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S581). At this time, if the big hit start designation command is not received (Step S581; No), the variable display stop processing is ended, and the process waits until the big hit start designation command is received. When a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the jackpot start designation command, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred in transmission and reception of the command, and predetermined error processing may be executed.

  If the jackpot start designation command is received in step S581 (step S581; Yes), the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S582), End variable display stop processing.

  FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation item change setting process executed in step S578 of FIG. In the operation item change setting process shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a difference between operation history values (step SE01). As an example, in the process of step SE01, the trigger operation history value specified as the trigger operation history buffer value is compared with the push operation history value specified as the push operation history buffer value to specify these differences.

  Thereafter, based on the difference identified in step SE01, it is determined whether it is necessary to change the operation item (step SE02). As an example, in the process of step SE02, when the current operation item buffer value is "1" and the stick controller 30 is the operation item, the push operation history value is a predetermined value (for example, " 5) etc.), it may be determined that the operation item buffer value needs to be changed to "2". Also, when the current operation item buffer value is "2" and the push button 31B is an operation item, the trigger operation history value is larger than the push operation history value by a predetermined value (for example, "5"). For example, it may be determined that the operation item buffer value needs to be changed to "1". Then, based on the determination result in step SE02, it is determined whether or not the operation item is to be changed (step SE03).

  If it is determined in step SE03 that no change is made (step SE03; No), the operation item change setting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change is made in step SE03 (step SE03; Yes), the operation item buffer setting is updated after updating the operation item buffer value (step SE04). As an example, in the process of step SE04, setting to update the operation item buffer value from "1" to "2", setting to update the operation item buffer value from "2" to "1", etc. Just do it.

  FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot effect processing executed in step S175 of FIG. In the jackpot inside effect processing shown in FIG. 58, the CPU for effect control 120 first determines whether or not there has been reception of a jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 (step S591). At this time, if the big hit end designation command is received (step S591; Yes), the setting for ending the execution of the big hit effect corresponding to the big hit gaming state is performed (step S592). Then, after updating the value of the rendering process flag to "6" which is a value corresponding to the big hit end rendering processing (step S593), the big hit internal rendering processing is ended.

  If the big hit end designation command is not received at step S591 (step S591; No), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed (step S594). For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 is provided with a pre-reading effect flag set in the on state during execution of the pre-reading effect, and in the process of step S594, the pre-reading effect flag is on. Whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed may be determined by determining whether or not it is.

  If the pre-reading effect is not being executed at step S594 (step S594; No), it is determined whether the pre-reading effect start timing has come (step S595). Here, the start timing of the pre-reading effect is, for example, the timing when the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, "5"), or the elapsed time from the start of the big hit gaming state is predetermined time (for example, It may be predetermined as an arbitrary timing related to the progress of the game in the big hit gaming state, such as the timing when one minute is reached).

  When it is the start timing of the pre-reading effect in step S595 (step S595; Yes), the pre-reading effect determination process is executed (step S596), and the big hit in-between effect process is ended.

  If the prereading effect is being executed in step S594 (step S594; Yes), whether the prereading effect type corresponding to the effect mode (effect content) in the prereading effect is the prereading effect type CS1 It is determined whether or not it is (step S597). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, corresponding to the contents of the effect in the preread effect, the preread according to any of the preread effect type CS1 to the preread effect type CS3. A presentation can be performed. It is determined in the pre-reading effect determination process of step S596 which pre-reading effect according to which pre-reading effect type is to be executed. If it is determined in step S597 that the type is the pre-reading effect type CS1 (step S597; Yes), the stick use pre-reading effect process is executed (step S598), and the big hit medium effect processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S597 that the type is not the pre-reading effect type CS1 (step S597; No), it is determined whether or not it is the pre-reading effect type CS2 (step S599). At this time, if it is determined that the type is the pre-reading effect type CS2 (step S599; Yes), the continuous hitting pre-reading effect process is executed (step S600), and the jackpot in-progress process is ended. When it is determined in step S599 that the pre-reading effect type CS2 is not determined (step S599; No), the stick-push combined effect processing is executed corresponding to the pre-reading effect type CS3 (step S601), while a big hit End the rendering process.

  When it is determined in step S595 that it is not the start timing of the pre-reading effect (step S595; No), after performing the setting of the effect operation that becomes the big hit during the big hit gaming state (step S602) ), End the jackpot production process. For example, in the process of step S602, presentation control execution data may be read out from the presentation control pattern selected corresponding to the start of the big hit gaming state and the like, and presentation operation control may be executed according to the presentation control execution data.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading effect determination processing executed in step S596 of FIG. In the pre-reading effect determination process shown in FIG. 59, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the determination result storage number maximum value by, for example, reading the determination result storage count value (step S701). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified determination result storage number maximum value is equal to or more than a predetermined pre-reading effect execution possible value (for example, "1") (step S702).

  When it is determined in step S702 that the maximum determination result storage number value is less than the preread effect executability value (step S702; No), the preread effect determination process is ended in response to the non-execution of the preread effect. On the other hand, when the determination result storage number maximum value is greater than or equal to the preread effect execution possible value (step S702; Yes), the storage content of the winning determination result buffer 200 is checked (step S703). For example, in the process of step S703, the determination result stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 from "1" to the determination result storage number maximum value is sequentially read, and the determination indicating "winning determination" is made. It may be determined whether a result or a determination result indicating “within the specific pattern common range” is stored.

  Following the process of step S703, the prereading effect type determination table 140 is selected and set as a use table for determining the prereading effect type as any of a plurality of types (step S704). Further, numerical data representing a random number value SR1 for pre-reading effect type determination is extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the like (step S705). Then, based on the random number value SR1 and the like extracted in step S705, by referring to the prereading effect type determination table 140 selected as the use table, the prereading effect type including whether or not to execute the prereading effect (Step S706). At this time, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S706 is no pre-reading effect for which pre-reading effect is not performed (step S707).

  When it is determined in step S707 that there is no prereading effect (step S707; Yes), the prereading effect determination processing is ended in response to the non-prereading effect being executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S706 that one of the prereading effect type CS1 to the prereading effect type CS3 is selected and the prereading effect is executed (step S707; No), it is determined in step S706. Whether or not the pre-reading effect type is the pre-reading effect type CS2 corresponding to the pre-reading effect of changing the effect mode (content of the effect) according to the continuous operation (the continuous hitting operation) using the push button 31B Is determined (step S 708).

  If it is determined in step S706 that the pre-reading effect type CS1 or the pre-reading effect type CS3 is not the pre-reading effect type CS2 (step S708; No), the variable display result is "big hit" in the pre-reading effect The notification target initial position determination table 141 is selected and set as a use table for determining the initial position of the notification target to be notified of the possibility and the like (step S709). Further, numerical data indicating a random number value SR2 for determining an initial position for notification is extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the like (step S710). Then, by referring to the notification target initial position determination table 141 selected as the use table based on the random number value SR2 and the like extracted in step S710, among the determination results stored in the prize determination result buffer 200. The notification target initial storage number, which is the storage number of the determination result to be the initial position of the notification target, is determined (step S711).

  Following the process of step S711, a notification target storage number buffer value, which is a storage value of a notification target storage number buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example, is set (step S712). For example, in the process of step S712, the broadcast target initial storage number determined in step S711 may be stored as an initial value of the broadcast target storage number buffer.

  When it is determined in step S 708 that it is the pre-reading effect type CS 2 (step S 708; Yes), the notification object selection pattern is used as a use table for determining the notification object selection pattern to any one of a plurality of prepared patterns. The determination table 142 is selected and set (step S713). Further, numerical data indicating a random number value SR3 for determining a notification object selection pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, etc. (step S714). Then, based on the random number value SR3 and the like extracted in step S714, the notification target selection pattern to be used is determined by referring to the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 selected as the usage table (step S715). At this time, "1" is set as the initial value of the notification target storage number buffer (step S716).

  After one of the processes in steps S712 and S716 is performed, the effect control pattern to be used to execute the pre-reading effect is selected (step S717). For example, in the process of step S717, an effect control pattern prepared in advance may be selected corresponding to the pre-reading effect type determined by the process of step S706. Thereafter, after setting for starting the prereading effect is performed (step S 718), the prereading effect determination process is ended. In the process of step S 718, for example, the display control instruction specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like to start the display of the effect image in the read-ahead effect, etc. It is sufficient to start various rendering operations.

  60 and 61 are flowcharts showing an example of the stick use pre-reading effect process performed in step S598 in FIG. 58, corresponding to the case where the pre-reading effect type of the pre-reading effect type CS1 is performed. In the stick use pre-reading effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the operation explanation period based on, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the pre-reading effect type CS1. (Step S731 in FIG. 60). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step S731; Yes), after the control of the rendering operation to be the operation explanation effect is performed (step S732), the stick use effect processing is ended. In the process of step S732, for example, by transmitting the display control instruction designated by the display control data to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like, the effect image in the operation explanation effect is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5. The control of the rendering operation in the operation explanation rendering may be performed.

  When it is not the operation explanation period in step S731 (step S731; No), it is determined whether or not it is the tilt detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like (step S733). The tilt detection period is a period in which a player's instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is effectively detected.

  If it is determined in step S733 that the period is a tilt detection period (step S733; Yes), the determination result storage number maximum value is specified (step S734). Then, for example, it is determined whether the notification target storage number specified from the notification target storage number buffer value has reached the determination result storage number maximum value specified in step S734 (step S735). Here, when the notification target storage number has reached the determination result storage number maximum value, the storage number in the prize determination result buffer 200 is a target for reporting the possibility that the variable display result will be the "big hit" in the read ahead effect. The variable display corresponding to the judgment result in which the judgment result storage number maximum value is selected is selected. That is, in the start winning storage display area 5H, the variable display corresponding to the display part at the right end (the variable display finally put on hold) is selected as the notification target among the display parts where the display color is changing. Therefore, if the notification target storage number has reached the determination result storage number maximum value, there is nothing more than this in the start winning storage display area 5H to indicate the suspension of the variable display in the display part on the right, and the notification target is on the right. Transfer to hold (new hold) is restricted (prohibited).

  Therefore, only when the determination result storage number maximum value is not reached in step S735 (step S735; No), based on the operation detection signal and the like transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32, It is determined whether there is a detection (step S736). At this time, if the tilt operation is detected in the right direction (step S736; Yes), for example, the rightward tilt count value stored in the rightward tilt counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is incremented by one. (Step S737).

  Subsequently to the process of step S737, it is determined whether the rightward tilt count value has reached an object change determination value predetermined by the effect control pattern or the like (step S738). At this time, if the target change determination value is reached (step S738; Yes), the notification target storage number buffer value is updated so as to be incremented by one (step S739). As a result, the variable display corresponding to the determination result with the storage number larger by 1 in the winning determination result buffer 200 is selected as a target for informing the possibility that the variable display result is a "big hit" in the preread effect.

  If there is no detection of the tilting operation in the right direction in step S736 (step S736; No) or after the processing in step S739 is executed, the count value is “0” by clearing the right direction tilting counter or the like. (Step S740).

  When the notification target storage number has reached the determination result storage number maximum value in step S735 (step S735; Yes), or when the rightward tilt count value has not reached the target change determination value in step S738 (step S738) No) or after execution of the process of step S740, for example, it is determined whether or not the notification target storage number specified from the notification target storage number buffer value is “1” (step S741). Here, when the notification target storage number is “1”, the storage number at the winning determination result buffer 200 is “1” as a target for reporting the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” by the read ahead effect. The variable display corresponding to the judgment result is selected. That is, in the start winning storage display area 5H, the variable display (variable display suspended at the forefront) corresponding to the display area at the left end among the display areas where the display color is changed is selected as the notification target. Therefore, if the notification target storage number is “1”, there is nothing on the left display area in the start winning storage display area 5H to indicate that the variable display is suspended, and the notification target is suspended on the left (old suspension) It is restricted (prohibited) to move to

  Therefore, only when the notification target storage number is not “1” in step S 741 (step S 741; No), based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32, etc. It is determined whether there is a detection (step S742). At this time, if there is a detection of tilting operation in the left direction (step S742; Yse), for example, the left-direction tilt count value, which is the storage value of the left-direction tilt counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is incremented by one. (Step S743).

  Subsequently to the process of step S743, it is determined whether the leftward tilt count value has reached a target change determination value predetermined by the effect control pattern or the like (step S744). At this time, if the target change determination value is reached (step S744; Yes), the notification target storage number buffer value is updated so as to be decremented by 1 (step S745). As a result, the variable display corresponding to the determination result in which the storage number is smaller by 1 is selected in the prize determination result buffer 200 as a target for informing the possibility that the variable display result is a "big hit" in the preread effect.

  If there is no detection of the tilting operation in the left direction in step S742 (step S742; No) or after the processing in step S745, the count value is “0” by clearing the left direction tilting counter or the like. (Step S746).

  When it is not the tilt operation period in step S733 (step S733; No), or when the notification target storage number is "1" in step S741 (step S741; Yes), the leftward tilt count value is not large in step S744. When the target change determination value is not reached (step S744; No), or after the process of step S746 is performed, it is determined whether it is a push detection period based on settings in the effect control pattern, etc. (Step S747 in FIG. 61). The operation explanation period, the tilt detection period, and the push detection period corresponding to the preread effect type CS1 of the preread effect type CS1 are the operation explanation period and the tilt detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-1 shown in FIG. It may be set by the effect control pattern or the like so as to start and end in the same order as the period. In particular, the squeeze detection period may be started after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the tilting operation period.

  If it is determined in step S747 that the push detection period is not in progress (step S747; No), the stick use pre-reading effect process is ended. On the other hand, when it is in the push detection period (step S747; Yes), whether or not the instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A has been detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined (step S748). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A (step S748; No), the stick use pre-reading effect process is ended. On the other hand, when an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A is detected (step S748; Yes), a notification target storage number indicated by, for example, a notification target storage number buffer value is specified (step S749). ).

  Subsequent to the process of step S749, notification that the variable display result is likely to be a "big hit" has been completed for the determination result (prefetch result) of the storage number corresponding to the identified notification target storage number It is determined whether it has been completed (step S750). Here, the information indicating whether or not the determination result (pre-reading result) of each storage number has been notified is the completion of pre-reading result notification provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 by the processing of step S757 described later. It may be stored in a buffer or the like.

  When it is determined in step S750 that the pre-reading result has been notified (step S750; Yes), the stick use pre-reading effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the pre-reading result is not notified (step S750; No), the determination result stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 is read out (step S751). For example, the determination result stored in the win determination result buffer 200 in association with the same storage number as the notification target storage number may be read out. Thereafter, it is determined whether the read determination result indicates the winning determination or not (step S752). At this time, if it is not the winning judgment (step S752; No), it is further determined whether the determination result indicates the specific pattern common range (step S753).

  If it is determined at step S752 that a winning hit is judged (step S752; Yes), or if it is within the specific pattern common range at step S753 (step S753; Yes), chance notification is made based on settings in the effect control pattern, etc. The rendering operation control for executing the rendering is performed (step S754). At this time, for example, the chance notification completion flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to the on state (step S755). When it is not within the specific pattern common range at step S753 (step S753; No), the rendering operation control for executing the loss notification effect is performed corresponding to being outside the specific pattern common range (step S756).

  After performing any of the processes in steps S755 and S756, for example, by storing the notification target storage number specified from the notification target storage number buffer value in the read ahead result notification completion buffer, the notification of the read ahead result is completed. Is stored (step S757), the stick use pre-reading effect process is ended. Thus, with regard to the determination result (prereading result) stored in the win determination result buffer 200 in association with the same storage number as the notification target storage number, the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed. It may be stored that notification of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is completed. Regarding the determination result (prereading result) of the storage number held by the prereading result notification completion buffer, even when an instruction operation (push operation) to the trigger button 31A is detected in step S748, the prereading is performed in step S750. Since it is determined that the result has been notified, it is possible to prevent the chance notification effect and the loss notification effect from being performed redundantly.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous hitting prior reading effect process executed in step S600 of FIG. 58, corresponding to the case where the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 is executed. In the continuous hit prior reading effect process shown in FIG. 62, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is an operation explanation period based on, for example, settings in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the preread effect type CS2. Is determined (step S771). Then, when it is the operation explanation period (step S771; Yes), after the control of the rendering operation to be the operation explanation effect is performed (step S772), the continuous hitting prior reading effect process is ended.

  When it is not the operation explanation period in step S771 (step S771; No), it is determined whether or not it is the operation detection period based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like (step S773). The operation detection period is a period in which the player's instruction operation (press operation) on the push button 31B is effectively detected, but the player's instruction operation (push operation) on the trigger button 31A can also be detected effectively. . Therefore, the player may operate the push button 31B or may operate the trigger button 31A.

  When it is not the operation detection period in step S773 (step S773; No), the continuous hit prior reading effect process is ended. In addition, even when it is not the operation detection period, the rendering operation control other than the operation detection period may be performed based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like. On the other hand, when it is the operation detection period (step S773; Yes), whether or not the instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B has been detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B. It determines (step S774). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B (step S774; No), an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A. It is determined whether there is a detection (step S775). Thus, in the prereading effect using the push button 31B corresponding to the prereading effect type CS2, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B is detected, and an instruction operation on the push button 31B (pressing According to the operation), the effect mode (content of the effect) can be changed, and it is also determined whether or not an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A is detected, and an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A Can be changed according to the effect mode (content of effect).

  When there is no instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A in step S775 (step S775; No), the continuous hit prior reading effect process is ended. On the other hand, an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B is detected in step S774 (step S774; Yes), or an instruction operation (pushing and pulling operation) on the trigger button 31A is detected in step S775. In the case (step S775; Yes), for example, the operation number count value, which is the storage value of the operation number counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like, is updated to add 1 (step S776).

  Following the process of step S776, the notification execution determination value indicated in the notification object selection pattern is specified (step S777). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 may specify the notification execution determination value by referring to the notification target selection pattern selected as the usage pattern based on the notification target storage number indicated by the notification target storage number buffer value or the like. . Thereafter, it is determined whether the operation number count value has reached the notification execution determination value (step S778). At this time, if the notification execution determination value is not reached (step S778; No), the continuous hit prior reading effect process is ended.

  When the operation number count value reaches the notification execution determination value at step S778 (step S778; Yes), the operation number counter is cleared to initialize the count value to "0" (step S779). Further, for example, a notification target storage number indicated by a notification target storage number buffer value or the like is specified (step S780). Subsequently, the determination result of the storage number corresponding to the identified notification target storage number is read out from the in-winning determination result buffer 200 (step S781). Then, it is determined whether the read determination result indicates the winning determination or not (step S 782). At this time, if it is not the winning judgment (step S782; No), it is further determined whether the determination result indicates the specific pattern common range (step S783).

  When it is the winning hit determination in step S 782 (step S 782; Yes), or in step S 783 when it is within the specific pattern common range (step S 783; Yes), chance notification is made based on the setting etc. The rendering operation control for executing the rendering is performed (step S784). At this time, for example, the chance notification completion flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is set to the on state (step S 785). When it is not within the specific pattern common range at step S783 (step S783; No), in response to being outside the specific pattern common range, the rendering operation control for executing the loss notification effect is performed (step S786).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S785 and S786, for example, it is determined whether the notification target storage number specified from the notification target storage number buffer value has reached the maximum determination result storage number (step S787). ). Then, when the determination result storage number maximum value is reached (step S787; Yes), since the chance notification effect and the loss notification effect corresponding to all the determination results (pre-reading results) are completed, the operation detection period is ended. Then (step S788), the consecutive hitting pre-reading effect processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination result storage number maximum value has not been reached (step S787; No), there is a determination result (prefetch result) for which chance notification effect or loss notification effect has not been executed yet, After the notification target storage number buffer value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S 789), the continuous hitting prior reading effect process is ended.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the stick-push combined read-ahead effect process executed in step S601 in FIG. 58, corresponding to the case where the read-ahead effect of the read-ahead effect type CS3 is performed. In the stick-push combined pre-reading effect process shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 120 first performs the stick use pre-reading effect process similar to the case where the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 is executed (step S801) . In addition, even if the stick use pre-reading effect processing similar to the case where the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 is executed is performed, the effect in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 by the setting etc. It is sufficient that the mode (render content) can be made different from the player mode (render content) in the preread effect of the preread effect type CS1.

  After executing the stick use pre-reading effect process in step S801, it is determined whether or not it is a pressing detection period based on settings in the effect control pattern (step S802). The pressing detection period is a period in which a player's instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B is effectively detected.

  The pressing detection period may be started after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the pressing detection period is started based on the setting in the effect control pattern or the like. FIG. 64 shows a setting example of the operation explanation period, the tilt detection period, the push detection period, and further the press detection period. In the setting example shown in FIG. 64, the push detection period, the push detection period, and the press detection period are the same as the operation explanation period, the tilt detection period, and the press detection period corresponding to the operation effect C-2 shown in FIG. It may be started in order. For example, timing T3 that comes after the start timing T2 of the push detection period is the start timing of the touch detection period.

  Note that the start timing T2 of the push detection period and the start timing T3 of the push detection period may be set to the same timing so that the push detection period is also started simultaneously with the start of the push detection period. Alternatively, when there is no instruction operation (tilt operation) on the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30 in the tilt detection period, or when there is no instruction operation (push operation) on the trigger button 31A in the push detection period, The detection period may not be started. That is, in the pressing detection period, there is an instruction operation (tilting operation) to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 in the tilting detection period, or an instruction operation (pushing operation) on the trigger button 31A in the pushing detection period. It may be started on condition that one or both of the things that have been done. Thereby, when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS3 is executed, there is no instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30, or the instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A. If not, the rendering operation specific to the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS3 may not be performed, and only the rendering operation common to the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 may be performed.

  After the depression detection period is started, when an instruction operation (depression operation) to the push button 31B is detected, as shown by a broken line in FIG. After the end, the instruction operation by the player may be invalidated (prohibition of detection).

  After the rendering operation control (step S754 in FIG. 61) for executing the chance notification effect is performed in the stick use pre-reading rendering process of step S801, control is performed so as not to be the pressing detection period, and the variable display is performed. It may not be notified in duplicate that a variable display that may result in a "big hit" is suspended. When it is not a pressing detection period in step S802 (step S802; No), the stick-push combined pre-reading effect process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S802 that the depression detection period is established (step S802; Yes), effect operation control for executing the push promotion effect is performed (step S803). The push promotion effect only needs to include an effect operation that urges an operation act on the push button 31B in the same effect mode (action content) as the operation promotion effect in the case of executing the "operation advance notice". Thereafter, based on an operation detection signal or the like transmitted from the push sensor 35B, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B has been detected (step S804). At this time, if there is no instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B (step S804; No), the stick-push combined pre-reading effect process is ended.

  When an instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B is detected in step S804 (step S804; Yes), all the determination results stored in the in-pricing determination result buffer 200 are read out (step S805). In this embodiment, the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS3 is executed only when the judgment result indicating the winning judgment is stored in the winning judgment result buffer 200 (FIG. 17A). reference). Therefore, among the determination results read out in step S805, one indicating the winning determination is included.

  Subsequent to the process of step S805, for example, based on settings in the effect control pattern, etc., effect operation control for performing all the informing effects is performed (step S806). In all notification effects, effects that notify the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" for all the pending variable displays or for variable displays for which the judgment result (prefetch result) has not been notified yet The action is taken. As an example, the chance notification effect and the loss notification effect corresponding to all the display parts whose display colors are changed in the start winning storage display area 5H may be performed at once. And since the preread effect of the preread effect type CS3 is executed only when the judgment result indicating the winning judgment is stored, when all the informing effects are executed or all the informing effects The chance notification effect is also performed before the is performed. Therefore, the chance notification completion flag is set to the on state (step S807). At this time, since notification is performed on all the determination results (pre-reading results), it is not necessary to detect any more instruction operations on the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B. Therefore, after each detection period is ended, such as the tilting operation period and the push detection period in the stick use pre-reading effect process or the pressing detection period in the stick-push combined pre-reading effect process (step S808) End the reading and rendering process.

  FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end effect process executed in step S176 of FIG. In the big hit end effect processing shown in FIG. 65, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether an ending effect is being executed which corresponds to the end of the big hit gaming state (step S611). For example, the effect control CPU 120 only needs to be able to determine whether the ending effect is in progress by determining whether the ending effect flag in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on. The ending effecting flag may be set to the on state when the setting for starting the ending effect is performed in the process of step S614 described later. In addition, the ending effecting flag may be cleared and turned off when it is determined that the ending effecting time has elapsed in the process of step S615 described later.

  When the ending effect is not in progress at step S611 (step S611; No), an ending effect determination process is executed (step S612). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the ending effect time (step S613). After the setting for starting the ending effect is performed based on the execution result of the ending effect determination process in step S612 (step S614), the big hit end effect process is ended.

  When the ending effect is being performed in step S611 (step S611; Yes), it is determined whether the ending effect time has elapsed (step S615). At this time, if the ending effect time has not elapsed (step S615; No), after performing the effect operation control for executing the ending effect (step S616), the big hit end effect processing ends. On the other hand, when the ending effecting time has elapsed (step S615; Yes), the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0" (step S617), and the big hit end effect processing is ended.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect determination process executed in step S612 in FIG. In the ending effect determination process shown in FIG. 66, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not pre-reading effect has been executed while in the big hit gaming state (step S831). For example, the effect control CPU 120 only needs to be able to determine whether or not the preread effect has been executed by determining whether or not the preread effect execution flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on. . The pre-reading effect execution flag may be set to the on state, for example, by the process of step S 718 shown in FIG. 59, etc., corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading effect. In addition, the pre-reading effect execution flag may be cleared and turned off after the determination in step S831 is performed.

  If it is determined in step S831 that the prereading effect has been executed (step S831; Yes), it is determined whether the chance notification completion flag is on (step S832). At this time, if the chance notification completion flag is on (step S832; Yes), the chance notification completion flag is cleared to be in an off state (step S833).

  When the chance notification completion flag is off at step S832 (step S832; No), the determination result storage number maximum value is specified, for example, by reading the determination result storage count value (step S834). Then, it is determined whether the specified determination result storage number maximum value is equal to or more than a predetermined redetermination executable value (for example, “1”) (step S 835).

  If it is determined in step S 835 that the value is equal to or greater than the redetermination executable value (step S 835; Yes), the stored content of the winning determination result buffer 200 is checked (step S 836). For example, in the process of step S 836, the determination result stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 from “1” to the determination result storage number maximum value is sequentially read, and “determination of winning determination” is determined. It may be determined whether a result or a determination result indicating “within the specific pattern common range” is stored.

  Following the process of step S 836, an ending pre-reading effect determination table 143 is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not ending pre-reading effect is to be performed (step S 837). Further, numerical data indicating a random number value SR4 for determining a pre-reading effect at ending is extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the like (step S838). Then, based on the random number value SR4 extracted in step S838, it is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect at the time of ending by referring to the pre-reading effect determining table 143 at the time of ending selected as the use table S839). At this time, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S839 is the effect of executing the pre-reading effect at the time of ending (step S840).

  If it is determined in step S831 that the prereading effect is not executed (step S831; No), or if the maximum determination result storage number value is less than the redetermination executable value in step S835 (step S835; No) Or, when it is determined that there is no effect at step S 840 (step S 840; No), after selecting the effect control pattern prepared in advance for executing the normal effect at the end (step S 844), the ending effect End the decision process.

  After executing the process of step S833 based on the determination that the chance notification completion flag is on in step S832, or when it is determined that there is an effect in step S840 (step S840; Yes), the pre-reading effect during ending is performed After selecting the effect control pattern prepared in advance to execute (step S842), the ending effect determination process is ended.

  FIG. 67 shows an example of effect display in the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 or the prereading effect type CS3. In this effect display example, first, for example, the finalized display symbol of the big hit combination as shown in FIG. 67 (A) is completely stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (step S573 in FIG. 56). Thereafter, when it is determined in step S706 shown in FIG. 59 that the preread effect type CS1 or the preread effect type CS3 is determined, the process of steps S709 to S712 sets the storage number of the variable display to be the initial position of the notification target. Ru. As shown in FIG. 18, the notification target initial position determination table 141 stores each of the storage numbers below the determination result storage number maximum value such that what becomes the notification target initial storage number is determined at a predetermined ratio. The decision value is assigned to the number. As a result, every time the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 or the prereading effect type CS3 is started, the variable display to be the initial position of the notification target is randomly selected.

  In this way, when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 or the prereading effect type CS3 is started, the operation explanation period starts first (step S731 in FIG. 60; Yes), the effect operation control in step S732, etc. The effect image for urging the player to perform an instruction operation (tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A as shown in FIG. After that, when the operation explanation period ends (step S731; No), the tilt detection period comes first (step S733; Yes), and the instruction operation (tilt operation) to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is validated.

  In the tilt detection period, it is determined whether or not there is a rightward tilting operation on the operating rod 30A by the process of step S736 shown in FIG. 60, or whether there is a left tilting operation on the operating rod 30A by the process of step S742. The determination is performed, and the display regions indicated by the effect image of the hand as shown in FIG. 67C are sequentially updated according to the detection result of the tilting operation (steps S737 to S740, and S743 to S746). After a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the tilt detection period starts, it becomes a push detection period (step S747 in FIG. 61; Yes), an instruction operation (push operation) to the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30. ) Is activated.

  In the squeeze detection period, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction operation (push operation) on the trigger button 31A in the process of step S748, and if there is an operation (step S748; Yes), the prize determination result buffer At 200, the determination result (pre-reading result) stored in association with the storage number to be the notification target storage number is read out (step S751). Then, when the determination result indicates “hit when winning determination” (step S 752; Yes) or “in the specific pattern common range” (step S 753; Yes), the chance notification according to the notification target storage number As shown in FIG. 67 (E), by performing the effect operation control for executing the effect (step S754), after the effect image in which the character divides one of the display regions by a hammer is displayed, as shown in FIG. As shown in (F), an effect image or the like indicating a message such as "I have a chance to do it!" Is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the determination result (prereading result) corresponding to the notification target storage number indicates "outside the common pattern common range" (step S753; No), the loss notification effect according to the notification target storage number is By performing the rendering operation control to be executed (step S756), after the effect image in which the character divides one of the display regions by a hammer is displayed as in FIG. 67 (E), and FIG. 67 (F) And the effect image etc. which show the message of "Sorry, lost ..." may be displayed.

  In the preread effect of the preread effect type CS1, for example, the effect of updating the notification target and dividing the display area can be repeatedly executed until the tilt detection period or the press detection period set by the effect control pattern or the like ends. It may be made to be able to divide the display part of the start winning a prize storage display area 5H sequentially.

  In the pre-reading effect type CS3 of the pre-reading effect type, for example, after the push detection period is started, the pressing detection period is reached after a predetermined period has elapsed (step S802 in FIG. 63; Yes), an instruction operation on the push button 31B ( The pressing operation is activated. At this time, for example, by displaying a predetermined effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the player may be prompted to perform an instruction operation (press operation) on the push button 31B.

  In the pressing detection period, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B in the process of step S804, and if there is an operation (step S804; Yes) All the determination results (pre-reading results) stored are read out (step S805). Then, by performing rendering operation control for executing all the informing effects (step S806), as shown in FIG. 67 (G), an effect image in which the character divides all the display areas by a hammer is displayed. do it.

  In the pre-reading effect type CS3 of the pre-reading effect type, when the instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B is detected, the variable display result is “big hit for all the variable displays on which all notification effects are executed and held. The possibility of becoming "" is informed. After all such notification effects are executed, the detection periods such as the tilt detection period, the push detection period, and the pressing detection period may be ended regardless of the setting by the effect control pattern or the like (step S808).

  In the pre-reading effect type CS3 pre-reading effect, based on the settings in the effect control pattern, etc., until the depression detection period, rendering operation that will be the same effect mode (effect content) as the pre-reading effect type CS1 pre-reading effect May be performed. Thereby, the player determines which of the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 and the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS3 is executed in the period until the timing when the pressing detection period starts. It will be difficult to do. Then, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 is executed, it is determined that a "big hit" will be made in the suspended variable display. Thereby, even when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 is executed, the sense of expectation that the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS3 is executed is maintained, and the player's operation on the stick controller 30 is promoted. , The game interest can be improved.

  FIG. 68 shows an example of effect display and the like in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2. In this effect display example, first, for example, the finalized symbol of the big hit combination as shown in FIG. 68 (A) is completely stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (step S573 in FIG. 56). Thereafter, when the pre-reading effect type CS2 is determined in step S706 shown in FIG. 59, the notification object selection pattern is determined by the processing in steps S713 to S715. In this embodiment, three types of notification target selection patterns HSP1 to notification target selection patterns HSP3 as shown in FIG. 19B are prepared in advance, and setting of notification execution determination values according to the notification target storage numbers is performed. , Are different from each other. As shown in FIG. 19A, the notification target selection pattern determination table 142 determines the determination ratio of the notification target selection pattern HSP1 to the notification target selection pattern HSP3 according to the result of checking the stored contents of the winning determination result buffer 200. A decision value is assigned to each notification target selection pattern so as to differ. Thus, depending on the determination result indicating "when winning a prize is determined" or the determination result indicating "within the specific pattern common range", execution of chance notification effect or loss notification effect in the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 The ease (the required number of operations up to the notification effect execution) can be made different. In this example of effect display, the notification target selection pattern HSP3 is determined to be a use pattern by the process of step S715.

  Thus, when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 is started, it becomes an operation explanation period first (step S771 in FIG. 62; Yes), and the push operation as shown in FIG. An effect image for prompting the player to perform an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the button 31B is displayed. Thereafter, when the operation explanation period ends (step S771; No), the operation detection period starts (step S773; Yes), and the instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B is validated. At this time, not only the instruction operation (press operation) on the push button 31B, but also the instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A is validated. Therefore, the player can perform the operation requested by the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 also by the instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30.

  During the operation detection period, it is determined whether or not there has been an instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B in the process of step S774 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is an operation (step S774; Yes or step S775; Yes), the operation count value is incremented by one in step S776. When the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B and an instruction operation (pushing operation) on the trigger button 31A three times, the operation count value becomes "3." Here, when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 is started, the notification target storage number buffer value is set to “1” in step S716 shown in FIG. Then, in the process of step S777 shown in FIG. 62, “3” is specified as the notification execution determination value from the notification target selection pattern HSP3 based on the notification target storage number buffer value being “1”.

  In this way, when the operation number count value reaches the notification execution determination value (step S778; Yes), it is stored in the prize determination result buffer 200 in association with the storage number "1" to be the notification target storage number in the process of step S781. The determination result (pre-reading result) being read out is read out. If the determination result read at this time indicates "outside the common pattern common range" (step S783; No), the rendering operation control for executing the loss notification effect according to the notification target storage number "1" As a result (step S786), as shown in FIG. 68C, an effect image is displayed to notify that the special view display result based on the pending data corresponding to the pending number "1" is "lost". . At this time, the notification target storage number buffer value is incremented by one and updated to "2" by the process of step S789.

  Thereafter, the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B and an instruction operation (pushing and pulling operation) on the trigger button 31A three more times, and the total number of operations since the prereading effect is started is six. When reached, since the notification execution determination value in the case where the notification target storage number is "2" is also "3" in the notification target selection pattern HSP3, it corresponds to the notification target storage number "2" in the process of step S781. The determination result (pre-reading result) stored in the winning determination result buffer 200 is read out. If the determination result read out at this time also indicates “outside the common pattern common range”, by performing the rendering operation control for executing the loss notification effect according to the notification target storage number “2”, as shown in FIG. As shown in (D), an effect image is displayed to notify that the special map display result based on the hold data corresponding to the hold number "2" is "loss".

  Furthermore, the player performs an instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B and an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A 12 times, and the total number of operations since the start of the prereading effect reaches 18 times Then, since the notification execution determination value in the case where the notification target storage number is “3” to “6” in the notification target selection pattern HSP3 is also “3”, the notification target storage number “6” in the process of step S781. The determination result (pre-reading result) stored in the prize determination result buffer 200 in association with “1” is read out. If the determination result read out at this time indicates "hit determination at winning" (Step S782 in FIG. 62; Yes) or if it indicates "within the specific pattern common range" (Step S783; Yes) Based on the hold data corresponding to the hold number “6” as shown in FIG. 68 (E), by performing the presentation operation control for executing the chance notification effect according to the notification target storage number “6”. A special image display result such as a "chance" which may result in a "big hit" and a direct image such as "Yatta ~!" Are displayed. When the chance notification effect is executed, the chance notification completion flag is set to the on state by the process of step S785 shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, when the jackpot gaming state ends, since the chance notification completion flag is on (step S 832 in FIG. 66; Yes), the effect control pattern for the pre-reading effect at ending is selected in step S 842, etc. Thus, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), an effect image or the like such as "I have a chance!" Is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the operating lever 30A capable of instructing operation (tilting operation) in multiple directions and the predetermined position of the operating lever 30A provided by the player An operation effect B or an operation effect C-1 using the stick controller 30 including an operation (push and pull operation) trigger button 31A and a predetermined instruction provided by the player at a predetermined position different from the operation rod 30A Among the operation effects A-1 or A-2 using the push button 31B capable of the operation (pressing operation), any of the effects selectively determined by the effect control CPU 120 executing the process of step SA06 shown in FIG. 40 For example, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the push button use reach effect process shown in FIG. 41 and step S558 in FIG. Alternatively, by the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the continuous hitting reach effect process shown in step S 560 of FIG. 41 or FIG. 46, or the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the tilt reach effect process shown in step S 562 or FIG. Alternatively, it is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the stick use reach effect process shown in step S 564 of FIG. 41 or FIG. 50. As a result, various effects using the stick controller 30 including the control rod 30A and the trigger button 31A and the push button 31B can be executed to improve the game interest.

  Since the process of step SA06 shown in FIG. 40 is executed based on the process of step SA02 being determined to be a variation pattern with super reach, even when the same variation pattern is determined, multiple types of processes are performed. It is possible to selectively determine which of the operation effects are to be performed among the operation effects of the above. Thereby, while preventing the burden of game control from increasing, various effects are performed using the stick controller 30 including the operating rod 30A and the trigger button 31A and the push button 31B to improve the game interest. Can.

  When the operation effect is determined in the process of step SA06, the operation effect determination table 144 as shown in FIG. 21A is referred to, and different operation effects can be determined according to the operation item buffer value. The operation item buffer value is set to a different value according to an instruction operation by the player, for example, by executing the processing of steps S454 to S458 shown in FIG. Thus, it is possible to execute an operation effect using an appropriate operation means in accordance with the preference of the player. Further, the operation item buffer value is set to be updatable based on the operation history of the player by executing the operation item change setting process shown in, for example, step S578 in FIG. 56 or FIG. Also by this, it is possible to execute an operation effect using an appropriate operation means in accordance with the preference of the player.

  When an operation effect using at least the operating rod 30A included in the stick controller 30, such as the operation effect B, the operation effect C-1, and the operation effect C-2, is performed, the effect by the processes of steps SC33 and SC35 shown in FIG. For example, the blower fan 33 is driven to blow the air to the stick controller 30, or the vibration motor 34 is driven to perform the stick by operation control or rendering operation control by the processes of steps SC57, SC59, and SC61 shown in FIG. In order to execute the blowing vibration effect as a predetermined effect operation that can be recognized by the player only when performing an instruction operation on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or the trigger button 31A by vibrating the operation rod 30A of the controller 30 or the like Air blow vibration control is performed. On the other hand, when an operation effect not using the stick controller 30 such as the operation effect A-1 or the operation effect A-2 is executed using only the push button 31B, effect operation control by the process of step SC06 shown in FIG. Or, in the effect operation control by the process of step SD20 shown in FIG. 46, the air blowing vibration control is limited (prohibited) so as not to be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily performing a predetermined effect operation that can be recognized by the player only when performing an instruction operation on a predetermined operation means, such as the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30, for example. It can be reduced.

  In the setting example of the operation effect determination table 144 shown in FIG. 21A, when the variable display mode is "non-probability change (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)", that is, the variable display result is "big hit" A decision value is assigned so that the operation effect C-2 can be determined only in the case. When the operation effect C-2 is determined in the process of step SA06 shown in FIG. 40, the stick controller using the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the stick / push combination reach effect process shown in step S566 or FIG. An operation effect C-2 using both 30 and the push button 31B is executed as a combined operation effect. In this manner, when the operation effect C-2 is executed, it is determined that the variable display result will be a "big hit", so the sense of expectation that the operation effect C-2 is executed is enhanced, and the stick controller 30 by the player is enhanced. By promoting operations such as, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  In the process of step SA16 shown in FIG. 40, when it is determined to be a big hit determined effect SP3 with reference to the big hit fixed effect determination table 146 as shown in FIG. 22A, steps SB25 and SB26 shown in FIG. The big hit decision effect is executed at the time of the first operation when the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30, the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B is first operated during execution of the operation effect by the effect control CPU 120 etc. Be done. When it is determined to be a big hit finalized effect SP4 in the process of step SA16 shown in FIG. 40, the effect controller CPU 120 or the like executing the process of steps SB27 to SB29 shown in FIG. In the achievement effect execution where the achievement effect corresponding to the instruction operation on the operation rod 30A, the trigger button 31A or the push button 31B is executed, the big hit determination effect is performed. As described above, by executing the big hit determination effect at the timing related to the instruction operation in the operation effect, it is possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the big hit determination effect and to improve the game entertainment. In addition, when the player performs an instruction operation in the operation effect, the big hit determination effect is executed, while when the player does not perform the instruction operation, the big hit determination effect is not performed, the operation effect is performed. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the instruction operation in

  When the operation effect A-1 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B has been performed in the process of step SC04 shown in FIG. It is then determined whether or not an instruction operation (push and pull operation) has been performed on the trigger button 31A, and if there is an operation in any of the determinations, the processes of steps SC09 to SC13 can be executed. Therefore, in response to an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A, the operation effect A-1 is executed in the same effect mode (effect content) as the instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B. When the operation effect A-2 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B has been performed in the process of step SD04 shown in FIG. In the process, it is determined whether or not an instruction operation (push operation) to the trigger button 31A has been made, and if an operation has been made in any of the determinations, processes such as steps SD08 to SD10 become executable. Therefore, in response to an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A, the operation effect A-2 is executed in the same effect mode (display content) as the instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B. As a result, in the operation effect A-1 and the operation effect A-2, even if the player performs an instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A instead of the instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B. Since the effect mode (content of effect) is achieved, the player's interest can be concentrated on the operation of the stick controller 30, the operation by the player can be promoted, and the game interest can be improved.

  When the operation effect A-2 is executed, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps SD08 and SD09 shown in FIG. 46, the number of times it is determined that there is an operation in the processing of step SD04 and step SD05 is predetermined. Depending on whether or not the number of dolphins has been reached, the determination result of the presence or absence of a hit may be made different. Since the push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position separate from the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30, it is easier for the player to perform a continuous instruction operation (continuous hitting operation) than the trigger button 31A. Therefore, the effect mode (effect content) in the operation effect A-2 using the push button 31B is appropriately changed according to the instruction operation (pressing operation) on the push button 31B to heighten the player's willingness to participate, and the game is entertaining Can be improved.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, an operating rod 30A capable of instructing operation (tilting operation) in multiple directions and a predetermined position of the operating rod 30A are provided, and the player performs a predetermined instruction operation (pushing operation). The preread effect of the preread effect type SC1 using the stick controller 30 consisting of the possible trigger button 31A and the player can be provided with a predetermined instruction operation (pressing operation) provided at a predetermined position different from the operation rod 30A Of the pre-reading effects of the pre-reading effect type SC2 using the correct push button 31B, any pre-reading effect determined by the effect control CPU 120 executing the process of step S706 shown in FIG. 59 is the step S598 of FIG. 60 and 61 or by the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the stick use pre-reading effect process shown in FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, or step S600 in FIG. Due presentation control CPU120 for executing a barrage destination 読演 out process shown in and executed. As a result, various effects using the stick controller 30 including the control rod 30A and the trigger button 31A and the push button 31B can be executed to improve the game interest.

  When the type of pre-reading effect type is determined in the process of step S706 shown in FIG. 59, the result of checking the memory content of the winning determination result buffer 200 in step S703 or the type of pre-reading effect type extracted in step S705 Whether or not the prize determination result buffer storage content check result is “presence in winning determination” by referring to the prereading effect type determination table 140 selected in step S704 based on numerical data indicating the random number value SR1 of Depending on whether or not it is determined that the variable display in which the variable display result is "big hit" is suspended, either the preread effect type CS1 or the preread effect type CS2 at a different ratio It will be decided. Therefore, depending on which pre-reading effect of pre-reading effect type CS1 of the pre-reading effect type and the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2, depending on which pre-reading effect is executed, "big hit" in the variable display being held Thus, it is possible to make the player's operation of the stick controller 30 or the like different from the expectation of being given the game value by being controlled to the big hit game state, and to improve the game interest.

  In the setting example of the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A, when the winning determination result buffer storage content check result is “in winning determination at winning determination”, there are more determined values than in the other cases. It is assigned to the pre-reading effect type CS1. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 using the stick controller 30 is executed, "big hit" is displayed in the variable display being held than when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is performed. The sense of expectation by which the game value is given by being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is enhanced. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the prereading effect type CS1 of the prereading effect type CS1 is enhanced, the operation of the player on the stick controller 30 including the operation rod 30A and the trigger button 31A is promoted, and the game interest is improved. Can.

  In the prize determination result buffer 200, “within the specific pattern common range” or “outside the specific pattern common range” according to whether or not the random value SR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of the specific pattern common range. The determination result shown can be stored. For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the specific pattern common range is previously determined as a common numerical range determined as a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the number of Tokusyu reserve storages. That is, in the setting example of the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B shown in FIG. 11B and the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table 132C in time C shown in FIG. At least a part of the decision value corresponding to the variation pattern type CA2-3 in which the is classified is the same decision value (for example, "230" to "251") regardless of the number of stored special figures reserved when variable display is started. Is set. On the other hand, a determined value corresponding to the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1-3 in which the non-reach variation pattern is classified, and a variation pattern type CA2-1 and a variation pattern in which the variation pattern with normal reach is classified As the determination value corresponding to the type CA2-2, different determination values are set in accordance with the number of stored special-character storages when the variable display is started. When the gaming ball passes through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the CPU 103 of the microcomputer 100 for game control executes the processing of step S406 shown in FIG. 28 so that the random number MR3 is the same determined value. By determining whether any one of “230” to “251” is matched, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern with super reach is determined. When the effect control CPU 120 determines the pre-reading effect type in the process of step S706 shown in FIG. 59, the winning judgment result is obtained by referring to the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 as shown in FIG. Depending on whether or not the buffer storage content check result is “within the specific pattern common range”, that is, depending on whether or not it is determined to be determined as a variation pattern with super reach, the pre-reading effect at a different rate It is determined to be either the type CS1 or the pre-reading effect type CS2. Therefore, depending on which pre-reading effect of pre-reading effect type CS1 of the pre-reading effect type and the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2, depending on which pre-reading effect is executed, it is super reach By changing the sense of expectation for the reach effect to be executed, it is possible to promote the operation of the stick controller 30 or the like by the player and improve the game interest.

  In the setting example of the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 shown in FIG. 17A, the case of “other than the above” when the result of the determination at the time of winning a prize result buffer storage content check is “within the specific pattern common range” (specific pattern common More decision values are assigned to the pre-reading effect type CS1 than in the case of out of range). Therefore, when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS1 using the stick controller 30 is executed, the variable display being held is a display of the super reach than when the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is performed. The sense of expectation that reach production is executed is enhanced. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the prereading effect type CS1 of the prereading effect type CS1 is enhanced, and the player's operation on the stick controller 30 including the operation rod 30A and the trigger button 31A is promoted to improve the game interest. be able to.

  Further, in the process of step S406 shown in FIG. 28, CPU 103 determines the same determined value “230” set corresponding to fluctuation pattern type CA 2-3 regardless of the number of stored special views reserved when variable display is started. By determining whether or not the random number SR3 matches any of “1” to “251”, it is determined whether or not a change pattern with super reach is determined. Therefore, even before the variable display is started, it is possible to reliably determine that the change pattern with the super reach is determined.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines the pre-reading effect type in the process of step S706 shown in FIG. 59, the winning judgment result is obtained by referring to the pre-reading effect type determination table 140 as shown in FIG. Only when the buffer storage content check result is "winning determination hit determination", it may be determined to be a preread effect type CS3. At this time, the effect of the pre-reading effect type CS3 using both the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is performed by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the stick-push combined pre-reading effect process shown in step S601 of FIG. , Is executed as a combined operation effect. As described above, when the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS3 is executed, it is determined that the "big hit" will be made and the big hit gaming state is controlled in the held variable display, so the prereading effect type By enhancing the sense of expectation that the preread effect of CS3 is executed and promoting the operation of the stick controller 30 or the like by the player, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  In the preread effect of the preread effect type CS1, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S733 to S757 in the stick use preread effect process shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, etc., to operate the stick controller 30 or the like. The notification target storage number can be updated according to the instruction operation (tilt operation) for 30A, and the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect according to the notification target memory number when the instruction operation (push operation) for the trigger button 31A is made. Is executed. In this case, the notification target initial storage number indicating the initial position of the notification target is selected in step S709 based on the numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the notification target initial position extracted in step S710 shown in FIG. With reference to the notification target initial position determination table 141, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step S711 determines the storage number that is less than or equal to the notification result storage number maximum value at a predetermined ratio. Thereby, every time the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 is executed, the initial position of the notification target is changed, and the content of the instruction operation (the tilting operation) on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 requested by the player Can be promoted to promote the operation by the player to improve the game interest.

  When the preread effect of the preread effect type CS1 is executed, the setting operation in the effect control pattern or the like makes the tilt detection period earlier and the instruction operation (the tilt operation) to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is activated. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the pushing operation becomes a detecting period, and an instruction operation (pushing operation) on the trigger button 31A is validated. As a result, the trigger button 31A is erroneously instructed to operate before the operating rod 30A is operated to operate to update the alarm target storage number corresponding to the variable display to be notified, and the player It is possible to prevent an unintended chance notification effect or a loss notification effect being performed.

  When the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B has been performed in the process of step S774 shown in FIG. It is determined in the process of S775 whether or not an instruction operation (push and pull operation) has been performed on the trigger button 31A, and if any of the determinations indicate that there is an operation, the processes after step S776 can be executed. Therefore, in response to an instruction operation (push operation) on the trigger button 31A, the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 is executed in the same effect mode (action content) as the instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B. . As a result, in the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS2, the same effect mode can be obtained even if the player performs an instruction operation (push operation) on the trigger button 31A instead of the instruction operation (push operation) on the push button 31B. Since the player's attention is concentrated on the operation of the stick controller 30, the player's operation can be promoted to improve the game interest.

  In the pre-reading effect type CS2 of the pre-reading effect type, every time when it is determined in the process of step S774 shown in FIG. 62 that there is an instruction operation (pressing operation) to the push button 31B, the operation count value is counted by When the operation count value reaches the notification execution determination value in the process of step S778, the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect based on the determination result (prereading result) corresponding to the notification target storage number is executed. Ru. Since the push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position separate from the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30, it is easier for the player to perform a continuous instruction operation (continuous hitting operation) than the trigger button 31A. Therefore, the effect mode (effect content) in the pre-reading effect of the pre-reading effect type CS2 using the push button 31B is appropriately changed according to the instruction operation (depression operation) on the push button 31B to increase the player's willingness to participate Game fun can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S454 to S458 shown in FIG. 37, different operation effects can be determined based on the setting of the player, and step S578 in FIG. By performing the operation item change setting process shown in 57, it has been described that it is possible to determine different operation effects based on the operation history by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different operation effects may be determined based on any one of the setting of the player and the operation history by the player.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that the instruction operation by the player in the advance presentation effect is also taken into the operation history by the processing of steps SB04, SB05, SB07, SB08 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the operation effect may be determined by capturing only the instruction operation by the player in the operation effect into the operation history. Alternatively, in the case of changing the effect mode (content of effect) in response to an instruction operation on the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B in any effect operation including re-lottery effect or probability change promotion effect as well as the advance effect effect, An instruction operation by a person may be taken into the operation history, and the operation effect may be determined based on the operation history.

  In the above embodiment, the operation effect is being executed based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) as the determined special symbol in the special figure game and is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Achievement presentation and non-delivery effect to notify the possibility of becoming a "big hit" by variable display is executed, chance notification production and the loss notification to inform the possibility of becoming a "big hit" by the variable display held by pre-reading effect It has been described that the effect is to be performed. On the other hand, as the gaming value to be awarded by the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the probability that the definite special symbol in the special figure game becomes the big hit symbol is improved by becoming a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state. It may be. In this case, in the operation effect, the achievement effect or the non-delivery effect of notifying the possibility of becoming “15R probability variation big hit” or “16R probability variation big hit” is executed in the variable display being executed, and the variable display being held is read A chance notification effect or loss notification effect may be performed to notify the possibility of becoming "15R probability variation big hit" or "16R probability variation big hit".

  As an example, in the operation effect determination table 144, when the variable display mode is "probable change (big hit)", the operation effect A-1 or the operation effect B is not determined, and the operation effect A-2 or the operation effect The determination values may be assigned so that the determination ratio of C-1 is higher than in the other cases. In such a setting, when the operation effect A-2 or the operation effect C-1 is executed, "big hit" is displayed in the variable display being executed, and the big hit type is "15R positive variation" or "16R positive variation". The sense of anticipation to become a definite change state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is enhanced. In this case, the player's willingness to participate in the operation effect A-2 and the operation effect C-1 can be enhanced, and the player's operation to the stick controller 30, the push button 31B, etc. can be promoted to improve the game interest .

  As another example, when it is determined in step S402 in FIG. 28 that the special map display result is "big hit", numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination extracted in step S218 in FIG. Based on the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 or the like, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is determined as “15R probability variation” or “16R probability variation”. In accordance with the determination result at this time, the setting of the EXT data in the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning combination designation command is made different. Thereby, when the game ball passes the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening and the first starting condition and the second starting condition are satisfied, it is determined whether the variable display result is "big hit" or not. At the same time, in the case of a "big hit", it is determined whether or not to be a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the main substrate 11 to the effect control board 12 can specify the effect control command capable of specifying these determination results. Enable transmission to the On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, in the pre-reading effect type determination table 140, when the prize determination result buffer check result is "15R definite variation" or "16R definite variation" in "winning determination at winning", The determination value may be assigned so that any one of the pre-reading effect type CS1 to the pre-reading effect type CS3 is determined at a determination ratio different from that in the other cases. As an example, in the case of "15R definite variation" or "16R definite variation", the prereading effect type CS2 is not determined, and the determination ratio of the prereading effect type CS1 or the prereading effect type CS3 is otherwise It is sufficient if the decision value is assigned so as to be higher than. In such a setting, when the preread effect type CS1 or the preread effect type CS3 is executed, the big display is "big hit" or "15R positive change" or "big hit type" in the held variable display. The sense of expectation that will be a probability change state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is enhanced by becoming a 16R definite change. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the prereading effect type CS1 and the prereading effect type CS3 can be enhanced to promote the player's operation on the stick controller 30 and the like, and the game interest can be improved.

  As another example of the gaming value provided by the pachinko gaming machine 1, the upper limit number of times of the special figure game in which the time reduction control (time reduction control) and the high opening control are performed in the time reduction state after the big hit gaming state ends. (Time reduction number of times) may be made different depending on the determination result of the big hit type, and the time reduction number may be determined as a relatively large number of big hit types. In this case, in the operation effect, the achievement effect or the non-delivery effect may be executed to notify the possibility that the number of time reductions in the case of a "big hit" in the variable display under execution may be relatively large. In the reading effect, a chance notification effect or a loss notification effect may be performed to notify that the number of time reductions in the case of a "big hit" in the variable display being held may be relatively large.

  As another example of the gaming value provided by the pachinko gaming machine 1, as in the case where it is determined to be the big hit type of "16R positive change", for example, it is compared with the big hit type of "15R non positive change" or "15R positive change" The number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state (round number) may be determined to be a jackpot type with a relatively large number. In this case, in the operation effect, the achievement effect or the non-delivery effect may be executed to notify the possibility that the big hit type in the case of the "big hit" in the variable display being executed becomes "16R definite variation", In the pre-reading effect, the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect may be performed to notify the possibility that the big hit type in the case of the “big hit” in the variable display being held may be “16R certainty variation”.

  Also in the jackpot finalization effect, it may be notified that any one of the above-mentioned game values is provided. That is, the big hit finalization effect is, for example, that it has been decided that the probability change state is decided after the end of the big hit gaming state, or the upper limit of the special figure game in which time shortening control (time saving control) or high open control is performed after the big hit gaming state is over The fact that it has been decided that the number of times (time reduction) will be a relatively large jackpot type, the fact that it has been determined that the number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state (round number) is a relatively large jackpot type, or It is sufficient to notify that the grant of any game value has been decided, such as part or all of.

  In addition, according to the game state when the operation effect is executed, or the game state before the big hit game state where the pre-reading effect is executed, the decision ratio whether to execute the operation effect or the pre-reading effect, You may make it differ in the production | presentation aspect (content of presentation) etc. in the operation production and the pre-reading production. For example, when the gaming state before the game effect when the operation effect is executed and the gaming state before the big hit gaming state when the pre-reading effect is executed is the high probability low base state, special effect mode different from the normal effect mode The rarity of the effect may be enhanced by executing the operation effect or the pre-reading effect. Depending on the game state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the decision ratio whether to execute the operation effect or the pre-reading effect, the effect mode (effect content) in the operation effect or the pre-reading effect, etc. It is also good. For example, based on the determination that the jackpot type is "15R non-probability", when the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the operation effect and the pre-reading effect may not be performed.

  For example, as in the reach effect, the operation effect may be performed within a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized decorative symbol to be the final stop symbol is derived and displayed, or, for example, As a kind of probability variation promotion effect, it may be performed within a period from when a predetermined decorative symbol is derived and displayed until the display of the finalized decorative symbol which is the final stop symbol is finished.

  In the above embodiment, the operation presentation for notifying the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display being executed can be executed, and the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the held variable display is notified. It has been described that the pre-reading effect for the purpose is feasible. On the other hand, only one of the effects among the operation effect and the pre-reading effect may be executable. In addition, for example, as a predetermined effect to be executed during variable display, such as reach effect or preview effect, any one of preread effect types CS1 to CS3 can be selected and executed. Good. In this case, for example, when the operation effect is determined in the process of step SA06 shown in FIG. 40, the same process as the pre-reading effect determination process shown in step S596 or FIG. Whether or not to execute, or the like may be made to determine the type of pre-reading effect type to be performed. When it is determined in step S 555 shown in FIG. 41 that it is a super reach, the stick use pre-reading effect processing shown in step S 598 in FIG. 58 or FIG. 60 and FIG. The same processing as in step S600 in FIG. 58 or in FIG. 62, or the same processing as stick-push combined prefetching effect processing in step S601 of FIG. 58 or FIG. 63 is executed. As a result, presentation operation control for executing the pre-reading presentation may be performed.

  When the operation effect C-1 or the operation effect C-2 is executed, it is determined in step SC60 of FIG. 50 that there is a one-shot operation which is a single instruction operation (push and pull operation) on the trigger button 31A. In the above, it has been described that the effect rendering and the non-delivery rendering are executed by the processing of steps SC62 to SC65. On the other hand, the achievement effect or the non-delivery effect may not be executed until it is determined that there is a continuous fire operation which is a plurality of instruction operations (push and pull operations) on the trigger button 31A. That is, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display being executed may be notified by continuous instruction operation (continuous fire operation) on the trigger button 31A.

  In this case, for example, the ratio determined as the operation effect in which the possibility of becoming a "big hit" is notified based on the continuous fire operation on the trigger button 31A by setting of the determination value in the operation effect determination table 144, etc. It may be made lower than the ratio determined to the operation effect in which the possibility of becoming a "big hit" is informed based on the continuous fire operation to the push button 31B like -2. As a result, it is possible to lower the execution frequency of the operation effect requiring continuous shooting operation to the trigger button 31A, which has difficulty in continuous shooting operation, to increase the player's willingness to participate, and to improve the game interest.

  When the prereading effect of the prereading effect type CS1 or the prereading effect type CS3 is executed, it is determined in step S748 of FIG. 61 that an instruction operation (push and pull operation) to the trigger button 31A is performed in step S749. It has been described that the chance notification effect and the loss notification effect are executed by the processing of S757. On the other hand, the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect may not be performed until it is determined that there is a continuous fire operation that is a plurality of instruction operations (push and pull operations) on the trigger button 31A. That is, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" may be notified on the pending variable display by the continuous instruction operation (continuous fire operation) on the trigger button 31A.

  When the preread effect of the preread effect type CS2 is executed, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the pending variable display according to the number of instruction operations (press operation) on the push button 31B It has been described that notification is made in the order of storage numbers by one determination result stored in the determination result buffer 200. On the other hand, in response to a single instruction operation such as an instruction operation (press operation) on the push button 31B being held for a predetermined period or longer by the player, the determination result (prefetch result) to be notified is It may be determined. Further, the number of determination results (prefetching results) notified each time the number of instruction operations (pressing operations) on the push button 31B reaches the notification execution determination value is arbitrary, and is stored in the prize determination result buffer 200 Notification may be sequentially performed on a plurality of (for example, two) of the determination results. Furthermore, the order of informing is also arbitrary, and informing may be performed on the determination result (prefetching result) first associated with the storage number "2", or the determination result (informing result) to be notified May be randomly selected.

  In the preread effect of the preread effect type CS1 to the preread effect type CS3, it has been described that the chance notification effect or the loss notification effect according to the notification target storage number is executed. On the other hand, for example, when the determination result indicating "winning in winning determination" is stored in the winning determination result buffer 200, notification is given on the determination result before (for example, two pieces before) the determination result. When being performed, it is possible to give notice of the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the held variable display by displaying an effect image such as "2 pieces ahead". In addition, when a plurality of determination results indicating “winning in winning determination” are stored in the in-winning determination result buffer 200, the chance notification effect is executed for any one determination result while the other determination results are obtained. Is not a chance notification effect but may be notified not to be a "big hit" in a plurality of held variable displays by executing a loss notification effect.

  In the above embodiment, the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A according to the winning order of each gaming ball regardless of which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed Has been described as being executed with the special drawing game using the second special symbol display device 4B and the special drawing game using the second special drawing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 4B is used as the special drawing using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 4A. It may be executed prior to the figure game.

  In this case, the special view display result in the special view game using the first special view is "big hit" when high open control is being performed in the big hit game state, or when the high open control is performed in the time saving state or the definite change state. Even if the determination result of the "hit determination at winning" is stored, it is possible not to execute the pre-reading effect. Thereby, when the gaming ball easily passes through the second starting winning opening, the special figure holding storage unit 151A stores the numerical data indicating the random number values extracted based on the passing in the special data holding storage unit 151A. It is possible to prevent stocking of the determination result (prefetching result) in which the display result is “big hit”.

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with one special symbol display device The invention can be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 performs the process of steps S521 to S526 shown in FIG. 39, the variable display effect setting shown in step S527 or FIG. 40, and the step S553 shown in FIG. The subsequent processes, in particular, the notice effect control process shown in step S553 or FIG. 42, the jackpot determination effect control process shown in step S554 or FIG. 43, the push button use reach effect process shown in step S558 or FIG. 48, the stick use reach production process shown in step S564 and FIG. 50, the stick push combined reach production process shown in step S566 and FIG. 53, and FIG. The pre-reading effect determination shown in step S596 of FIG. By executing the stick use pre-reading effect process shown in step S598 or FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the continuous hitting pre-reading effect process shown in step S600 or FIG. 62, the step S601 or FIG. , It demonstrated as what performs determination and control of various presentation operation | movement. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, control contents of various rendering operations may be shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs or the like mounted respectively on a plurality of control boards provided to control rendering operations. You may

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. The display control substrate may be mounted with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, etc., it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, when the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, processing for controlling a rendering operation by displaying a rendering image on the image display device 5 is performed. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the fixed data read operation, the display control CPU writes various fluctuation data to the RAM and temporarily stores the fluctuation data write operation, and the display control CPU reads the fixed data. Fluctuation data read operation to read various fluctuation data stored temporarily, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of display control board via CPU for display control via I / O, I / O for CPU for display control Also, a transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board via

  In this case, the display control CPU performs steps S521 to S526 shown in FIG. 39 based on, for example, a display control command from the effect control board 12 and a effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12. Processing, variable display effect setting in step S527, processing after step S553 shown in FIG. 41, pre-reading effect determination processing in step S596 shown in FIG. 58, stick use pre-reading effect processing in step S598, continuous hit pre-reading in step S600 Either the effect processing or the stick-push combined read-ahead effect processing of step S601 may be executed. In addition, CPU for display control should just perform arbitrary one part among the processes which CPU120 for presentation control performed in the said embodiment. Further, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by a wire for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a process for controlling the effect operation in an integrated manner.

  Alternatively, the voice control circuit 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be provided with the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 separately in the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, the display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and is determined or selected in step S528 of FIG. 39 or step S717 of FIG. A display control command corresponding to the effect control pattern or the like may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 3, any one of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the voice control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 The unit may be implemented. As described above, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the sound output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The processing for determining the control content of various rendering operations such as the processing for determining the content and the processing for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 is any of the control boards The combination to be implemented may be any combination.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "loss". On the other hand, the variable display result can be determined to "small hit", and at this time, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state, and after the small hit gaming state is finished, the change of the gaming state is not performed It is also good. Also, when the variable display result is "big hit", the big hit type can also be determined as "probable", and in this case it is controlled to 2R big hit state and after 2R big hit state is controlled to positive variation You may

  In the 2R big hit state, the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player in each round (period in which the big winning opening is opened by the big winning opening door) is 15R big hit state or 16R. The second period (eg, 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the first period in the jackpot state. Further, in the 2R big hit state, the number of rounds executed is the second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the round number in the 15R big hit state or the 16R big hit state. In the 2R big hit state, the number of executions of the round may be controlled to be the second round number, and the other control may be performed similarly to the 15R big hit state or the 16R big hit state. The game in the 2R jackpot state in which the number of rounds executed is "2" is also referred to as an open game twice. In the 2R big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round, the game is performed by changing a predetermined winning hole serving as a big winning hole from a closed state to an open state, etc. The second state may be changed from the second state disadvantageous to the player to the first state advantageous to the player and returned to the second state after the predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the 2R big hit state, a variable winning operation is performed to change the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation to make the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the first state (opened state) for the second period is repeatedly executed until the second number (execution number equal to the second round number) is reached. Be done. In the small hit gaming state, as in the 2R big hit state, the period in which the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is in the first state is the second period, and the number of times of execution of the operation in the first state is the second At least one of the above may be controlled to be performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the change of the gaming state is not performed, and the control is continued to the previous gaming state before the variable display result becomes "small hit". However, when the special view game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, if the number of times the special view game has been executed in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit gaming state ends, The special gaming state may end and be in the normal state. The game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as an open game twice, similarly to the game in the 2R big hit state. In the case of changing the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to the first state in each round in the 2R big hit state, even in the small hitting gaming state, in the same manner as the 2R big hitting state The winning ball device may be changed to the first state.

  Furthermore, in place of or in addition to the cases where the jackpot type is "probable" or the variable display result is "small hit", the case where "sudden time" or "suddenly normal" is provided You may do so. As an example, "sudden time short" and "suddenly normal" are included in the jackpot type in the case where the variable display result is "big hit". In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination according to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value as "probably", "suddenly short time", "suddenly The table data to be assigned to the “normal” jackpot type may be included. And when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "sudden time short", it is controlled to 2R big hit state as well as the case where the big hit type is "probable", and after 2R big hit state is finished Is controlled to a short time state (low probability high base state) unlike the case where the jackpot type is "probable". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "suddenly normal", it is controlled to the 2R big hit state in the same way as the big hit type is "probable", and after the 2R big hit state ends. Is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state) unlike the case where the jackpot type is "probable". As a result, the player's sense of expectation for the gaming state to be controlled after the end of the 2R jackpot state can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved.

  In the case where such "sudden time short" or "sudden normal" is provided, a change pattern type or change pattern different from those in cases other than "sudden short time" and "sudden normal" may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is controlled to the 2R big hit state by being "sudden time short" or "sudden normal", the same rendering operation as when it is controlled to the 15 R big hit state or the 16R big hit state is performed Can prevent the player from being distrusted. Also, when the big hit type is "sudden time short" or "sudden normal", the same variation pattern type as when the variable display result is "small hit" or when the big hit type is "probable" It may be possible to decide. As a result, when determining the variation pattern, it is determined that the jackpot type is "sudden time short" or "suddenly normal", or the variable display result is "small hit" or the big hit type is "probable". Regardless of the case, the common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 deviate from the spirit of the present invention. As long as it does not, it is possible to change and modify arbitrarily. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of winning balls in response to detection of winning balls, but encloses the gaming balls and responds to detection of winning balls. It can apply also to the enclosed type game machine which gives a score.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer It may be distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... ordinary winning ball device 6B ... ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... stick controller 30A ... operation stick 31A ... trigger button 31B ... push button 32 ... tilting direction sensor unit 33 ... blowing fan 34 ... vibration motor 35A ... trigger sensor 35B ... push sensor 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
First detection means capable of detecting a first action of the player on the operation unit;
Second detection means capable of detecting a second movement of the player;
An effect determination unit capable of determining which of the at least a first effect related to the first operation and a second effect related to the second operation are to be performed;
And an effect executing unit capable of executing the effect determined by the effect determining unit during the variable display.
The effect determining means selectively selects which of the first effect and the second effect to be performed even when the variable display pattern determining means determines the same variable display pattern. Determinable,
The apparatus further comprises vibration effect execution means incorporated in the operation unit and capable of vibrating.
The vibration rendering execution means is capable of vibrating when the first rendering is performed,
The effect executing means performs the effect according to the common effect mode, even when it is determined by the effect determining means that any of the first effect and the second effect is to be performed. 1 effect, and, of the second effect, Ri executable der the notification effect for notifying whether one of the effect is performed,
Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect which indicates the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player during execution of the variable display;
A determination unit capable of determining whether or not the specific effect is executed;
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, before the variable display targeted for the determination is started, it is possible to execute a special effect relating to any one of the first operation and the second operation. And a special effect executing means,
Any of the first effect and the second effect can be executed during execution of the specific effect.
A game machine characterized by